Asme Iii-1 NF 2013
Asme Iii-1 NF 2013
Asme Iii-1 NF 2013
III
Rules for Construction of
Nuclear Facility Components
Division 1 Subsection NF
Supports
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
5/15/13 5:22 PM
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
AN INTERNATIONAL CODE
III
RULES FOR CONSTRUCTION
OF NUCLEAR FACILITY
COMPONENTS
Division 1 - Subsection NF
Supports
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
This international code or standard was developed under procedures accredited as meeting the criteria for Amer-
ican National Standards and it is an American National Standard. The Standards Committee that approved the code
or standard was balanced to assure that individuals from competent and concerned interests have had an oppor-
tunity to participate. The proposed code or standard was made available for public review and comment that pro-
vides an opportunity for additional public input from industry, academia, regulatory agencies, and the public-
at-large.
ASME does not approve, rate, or endorse any item, construction, proprietary device, or activity.
ASME does not take any position with respect to the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any
items mentioned in this document, and does not undertake to insure anyone utilizing a standard against liability for
infringement of any applicable letters patent, nor assume any such liability. Users of a code or standard are ex-
pressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such
rights, is entirely their own responsibility.
Participation by federal agency representative(s) or person(s) affiliated with industry is not to be interpreted as
government or industry endorsement of this code or standard.
ASME accepts responsibility for only those interpretations of this document issued in accordance with the estab-
lished ASME procedures and policies, which precludes the issuance of interpretations by individuals.
The endnotes in this document are part of this American National Standard.
Certification Mark
Adopted by the Council of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 1914; latest edition 2013.
Copyright 2013 by
THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
All rights reserved
TABLE OF CONTENTS
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
List of Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Statement of Policy on the Use of the Certification Mark and Code Authorization in Advertising . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Statement of Policy on the Use of ASME Marking to Identify Manufactured Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Organization of Section III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxx
Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiii
List of Changes in Record Number Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxv
Cross-Referencing and Stylistic Changes in the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxvi
Article NF-1000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
NF-1100 Scope and General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
NF-1110 Aspects of Construction Covered by These Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
NF-1120 Rules for Supports and Their Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
NF-1130 Boundaries of Jurisdiction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
NF-1200 Types of Supports and Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
NF-1210 Types of Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
NF-1230 Welding Between Types of Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
NF-1240 Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Article NF-2000 Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
NF-2100 General Requirements for Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
NF-2110 Scope of Principal Terms Employed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
NF-2120 Support Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
NF-2130 Certification of Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
NF-2140 Welding Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NF-2150 Material Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NF-2160 Deterioration of Material in Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NF-2170 Heat Treatment to Enhance Impact Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NF-2180 Procedures for Heat Treatment of Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NF-2200 Material Test Coupons and Specimens for Ferritic Steel Material . . . . . . 11
NF-2210 Heat Treatment Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NF-2220 Procedure for Obtaining Test Coupons and Specimens for Quenched and
Tempered Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
NF-2300 Fracture Toughness Requirements for Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
NF-2310 Material to Be Impact Tested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
NF-2320 Impact Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
NF-2330 Test Requirements and Acceptance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
NF-2340 Number of Impact Tests Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
NF-2350 Retests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
NF-2360 Calibration of Instruments and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
NF-2400 Welding Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
NF-2410 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
NF-2420 Required Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
NF-2430 Weld Metal Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
NF-2440 Storage and Handling of Welding Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
NF-2500 Examination and Repair of Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
NF-2510 Examination and Repair of Material Other Than Bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
NF-2520 Required Examination and Acceptance Standards for Class 1 Springs . . 25
NF-2530 Required Examination and Acceptance Standards for Coiled Wire Rope
Used As a Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
NF-2580 Examination of Bolting Material and Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
NF-2600 Material Manufacturers Quality System Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
NF-2610 Documentation and Maintenance of Quality System Programs . . . . . . . . . 26
Article NF-3000 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
NF-3100 General Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
NF-3110 Loading Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
NF-3120 Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
NF-3130 General Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
NF-3140 General Design Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
NF-3200 Design Rules for Plate and ShellType Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
NF-3210 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
NF-3220 Design by Analysis for Class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
NF-3250 Design by Analysis for Class 2 and MC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
NF-3260 Design by Analysis for Class 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
NF-3270 Experimental Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
NF-3280 Design by Load Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
NF-3300 Design Rules for LinearType Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
NF-3310 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
NF-3320 Design by Linear Elastic Analysis for Class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
NF-3330 High Cycle Fatigue Design for Class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
NF-3340 Limit Analysis Design for Class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
NF-3350 Design by Analysis for Class 2 and MC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
NF-3360 Design by Analysis for Class 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
NF-3370 Experimental Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
NF-3380 Design by Load Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
NF-3400 Design Rules for Standard Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
NF-3410 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
NF-3420 Design by Analysis for Class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
NF-3450 Design by Analysis for Class 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
NF-3460 Design by Analysis for Class 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
NF-3470 Design by Experimental Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-3226.1-1 Permissible Welded Joints for Class 1 Plate and ShellType Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
NF-3226.1(a)-1 Typical Weld Details Referenced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
NF-3226.1(a)-2 Butt Welding of Plates of Unequal Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
NF-3256.1-1 Permissible Welded Joints for Class 2, 3, and MC Plate and ShellType Supports . . . . . . 39
NF-3324.1(a)(1) Typical FrictionType Connections Using High Strength Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
NF-3332.3-1 Illustrative Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
NF-3426.1-1 Additional Permissible Welded Joints for Class 1 Standard Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
NF-3626(a)-1 Additional Permissible Welded Joints for Class 1 Piping Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
NF-4427-1 Fillet Weld Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
NF-4441-1 Weld Joint Producing ThroughThickness Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
NF-II-3510 Equal Leg Single Angle Limits for F b = 0.66S y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
NF-A-1311 ........................................................................... 121
NF-B-2400-1 Effective Length Factor for Various End Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
NF-B-2400-2 Alignment Chart for Effective Length of Columns in Continuous Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
TABLES
NF-2121(a)-1 Material Tables Required for Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
NF-2311(b)-1 Exemptions From Impact Testing Under NF-2311(b)(9) and NF-2311(b)(10) for Mate-
rial Thickness to 21/2 in. (64 mm), Inclusive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
NF-2331(a)-1 Required Cv Lateral Expansion Values for Class 1 Support Material Other Than Bolting 17
NF-2331(a)-2 Required Cv Lateral Expansion Values for Class 2 And MC Support Material Other Than
Bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
NF-2331(a)-3 Required Cv Lateral Expansion Values for Class 3 Support Material Other Than Bolting 17
NF-2331(a)-4 Required Cv Energy Values for Class 1 Support Material Other Than Bolting . . . . . . . . 18
NF-2333-1 Required Cv Values for Bolting Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
NF-2432.1-1 Sampling of Welding Materials for Chemical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
NF-2432.2(a)-1 Welding Material Chemical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
NF-3131(a)-1 Reference Paragraphs for Procedures for Design of Component Supports, Piping Sup-
ports, and Standard Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
NF-3221.2-1 Elastic Analysis Stress Categories and Stress Limit Factors for Class 1 Plate And Shell
Type Supports Designed by Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
NF-3225.2-1 Stress Limit Factors for Class 1, 2, 3, and MC Bolt Design by Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
NF-3251.2-1 Elastic Analysis Stress Categories and Stress Limit Factors for Class 2, 3, and MC Plate
And ShellType Supports Designed by Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
NF-3312.1(b)-1 Elastic Analysis Stress Categories and Stress Limit Factors for Class 1, 2, 3, and MC
Linear-Type Supports Designed by Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
NF-3322.2(e)(2)-1 Limiting Proportions for Channels and Tees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
NF-3324.5(a)-1 Allowable Stress Limits for Class 1 LinearType Support Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
NF-3324.6(a)(4)-1 Effective Slip Coefficient Versus Surface Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
NF-3324.6(b)(1)-1 Minimum Edge Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
NF-3332.2-1 Classification of Loading Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
NF-3332.3-1 Stress Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
NF-3332.4-1 Allowable Stress Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
NF-3611-1 Suggested Piping Support Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
NF-4232-1 Maximum Allowable Offset in Final Butt Welded Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
NF-4622.1-1 Mandatory Requirements for Postweld Heat Treatment (PWHT) of Welds . . . . . . . . . . 95
NF-4622.4(c)-1 Alternative Holding Temperatures and Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
NF-4622.7(b)-1 Exemptions to Mandatory PWHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
NF-4721(a)-1 Bolt Hole Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
NF-4721(b)-1 Tolerances on Oversized Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
NF-II-3532-1 B w Values for Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
NF-B-4000 Factors of Safety for a Material With a Low Value of S u /S y Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
NF-C-4000 Design Basis for LinearType Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
NF-D-1320-1 Clamp Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
NF-D-1330-1 Local Installation Tolerances for Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
ENDNOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
13 LIST OF SECTIONS
SECTIONS
I Rules for Construction of Power Boilers
II Materials
Part A Ferrous Material Specifications
Part B Nonferrous Material Specifications
Part C Specifications for Welding Rods, Electrodes, and Filler Metals
Part D Properties (Customary)
Part D Properties (Metric)
V Nondestructive Examination
CODE CASES
The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code committees meet regularly to consider proposed additions and revisions to the
Code and to formulate Cases to clarify the intent of existing requirements or provide, when the need is urgent, rules
for materials or constructions not covered by existing Code rules. Those Cases that have been adopted will appear in
the appropriate 2013 Code Cases book: Boilers and Pressure Vessels or Nuclear Components. Supplements will be
sent automatically to the purchasers of the Code Cases books up to the publication of the 2015 Code.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
13 FOREWORD
(This Foreword is provided as an aid to the user and is not part of the rules of this Code.)
In 1911, The American Society of Mechanical Engineers established the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee to for-
mulate standard rules for the construction of steam boilers and other pressure vessels. In 2009, the Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Committee was superseded by the following committees:
(a) Committee on Power Boilers (I)
(b) Committee on Materials (II)
(c) Committee on Construction of Nuclear Facility Components (III)
(d) Committee on Heating Boilers (IV)
(e) Committee on Nondestructive Examination (V)
(f) Committee on Pressure Vessels (VIII)
(g) Committee on Welding and Brazing (IX)
(h) Committee on Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels (X)
(i) Committee on Nuclear Inservice Inspection (XI)
(j) Committee on Transport Tanks (XII)
Where reference is made to the Committee in this Foreword, each of these committees is included individually and
collectively.
The Committee's function is to establish rules of safety relating only to pressure integrity, which govern the
construction* of boilers, pressure vessels, transport tanks, and nuclear components, and the inservice inspection of nu-
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
clear components and transport tanks. The Committee also interprets these rules when questions arise regarding their
intent. This Code does not address other safety issues relating to the construction of boilers, pressure vessels, transport
tanks, or nuclear components, or the inservice inspection of nuclear components or transport tanks. Users of the Code
should refer to the pertinent codes, standards, laws, regulations, or other relevant documents for safety issues other than
those relating to pressure integrity. Except for Sections XI and XII, and with a few other exceptions, the rules do not, of
practical necessity, reflect the likelihood and consequences of deterioration in service related to specific service fluids or
external operating environments. In formulating the rules, the Committee considers the needs of users, manufacturers,
and inspectors of pressure vessels. The objective of the rules is to afford reasonably certain protection of life and prop-
erty, and to provide a margin for deterioration in service to give a reasonably long, safe period of usefulness. Advance-
ments in design and materials and evidence of experience have been recognized.
This Code contains mandatory requirements, specific prohibitions, and nonmandatory guidance for construction activ-
ities and inservice inspection and testing activities. The Code does not address all aspects of these activities and those
aspects that are not specifically addressed should not be considered prohibited. The Code is not a handbook and cannot
replace education, experience, and the use of engineering judgment. The phrase engineering judgement refers to technical
judgments made by knowledgeable engineers experienced in the application of the Code. Engineering judgments must be
consistent with Code philosophy, and such judgments must never be used to overrule mandatory requirements or specific
prohibitions of the Code.
The Committee recognizes that tools and techniques used for design and analysis change as technology progresses and
expects engineers to use good judgment in the application of these tools. The designer is responsible for complying with
Code rules and demonstrating compliance with Code equations when such equations are mandatory. The Code neither
requires nor prohibits the use of computers for the design or analysis of components constructed to the requirements
of the Code. However, designers and engineers using computer programs for design or analysis are cautioned that they
are responsible for all technical assumptions inherent in the programs they use and the application of these programs to
their design.
*
Construction, as used in this Foreword, is an all-inclusive term comprising materials, design, fabrication, examination, inspection, testing, cer-
tification, and pressure relief.
The rules established by the Committee are not to be interpreted as approving, recommending, or endorsing any pro-
prietary or specific design, or as limiting in any way the manufacturer's freedom to choose any method of design or any
form of construction that conforms to the Code rules.
The Committee meets regularly to consider revisions of the rules, new rules as dictated by technological development,
Code Cases, and requests for interpretations. Only the Committee has the authority to provide official interpretations of
this Code. Requests for revisions, new rules, Code Cases, or interpretations shall be addressed to the Secretary in writing
and shall give full particulars in order to receive consideration and action (see Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees). Proposed revisions to the Code resulting from inquiries will be pre-
sented to the Committee for appropriate action. The action of the Committee becomes effective only after confirmation by
ballot of the Committee and approval by ASME. Proposed revisions to the Code approved by the Committee are submitted
to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and published at http://cstools.asme.org/csconnect/public/in-
dex.cfm?PublicReview=Revisions to invite comments from all interested persons. After public review and final approval
by ASME, revisions are published at regular intervals in Editions of the Code.
The Committee does not rule on whether a component shall or shall not be constructed to the provisions of the Code.
The scope of each Section has been established to identify the components and parameters considered by the Committee
in formulating the Code rules.
Questions or issues regarding compliance of a specific component with the Code rules are to be directed to the ASME
Certificate Holder (Manufacturer). Inquiries concerning the interpretation of the Code are to be directed to the Commit-
tee. ASME is to be notified should questions arise concerning improper use of an ASME Certification Mark.
When required by context in this Section, the singular shall be interpreted as the plural, and vice versa, and the fem-
inine, masculine, or neuter gender shall be treated as such other gender as appropriate.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
STATEMENT OF POLICY ON THE USE OF THE CERTIFICATION
MARK AND CODE AUTHORIZATION IN ADVERTISING
ASME has established procedures to authorize qualified organizations to perform various activities in accordance with
the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. It is the aim of the Society to provide recognition of or-
ganizations so authorized. An organization holding authorization to perform various activities in accordance with the re-
quirements of the Code may state this capability in its advertising literature.
Organizations that are authorized to use the Certification Mark for marking items or constructions that have been con-
structed and inspected in compliance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code are issued Certificates of Author-
ization. It is the aim of the Society to maintain the standing of the Certification Mark for the benefit of the users, the
enforcement jurisdictions, and the holders of the Certification Mark who comply with all requirements.
Based on these objectives, the following policy has been established on the usage in advertising of facsimiles of the
Certification Mark, Certificates of Authorization, and reference to Code construction. The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers does not approve, certify, rate, or endorse any item, construction, or activity and there shall be no state-
ments or implications that might so indicate. An organization holding the Certification Mark and/or a Certificate of
Authorization may state in advertising literature that items, constructions, or activities are built (produced or per-
formed) or activities conducted in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
or meet the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. An ASME corporate logo shall not be used
by any organization other than ASME.
The Certification Mark shall be used only for stamping and nameplates as specifically provided in the Code. However,
facsimiles may be used for the purpose of fostering the use of such construction. Such usage may be by an association or a
society, or by a holder of the Certification Mark who may also use the facsimile in advertising to show that clearly spe-
cified items will carry the Certification Mark. General usage is permitted only when all of a manufacturers items are con-
structed under the rules.
The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code provides rules for the construction of boilers, pressure vessels, and nuclear
components. This includes requirements for materials, design, fabrication, examination, inspection, and stamping. Items
constructed in accordance with all of the applicable rules of the Code are identified with the official Certification Mark
described in the governing Section of the Code.
Markings such as ASME, ASME Standard, or any other marking including ASME or the Certification Mark shall not
be used on any item that is not constructed in accordance with all of the applicable requirements of the Code.
Items shall not be described on ASME Data Report Forms nor on similar forms referring to ASME that tend to imply that
all Code requirements have been met when, in fact, they have not been. Data Report Forms covering items not fully com-
plying with ASME requirements should not refer to ASME or they should clearly identify all exceptions to the ASME
requirements.
13 SUBMITTAL OF TECHNICAL INQUIRIES TO THE BOILER AND
PRESSURE VESSEL STANDARDS COMMITTEES
1 INTRODUCTION
(a) The following information provides guidance to Code users for submitting technical inquiries to the committees. See
Guideline on the Approval of New Materials Under the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code in Section II, Parts C and D
for additional requirements for requests involving adding new materials to the Code. Technical inquiries include requests
for revisions or additions to the Code rules, requests for Code Cases, and requests for Code Interpretations, as described
below.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(1) Code Revisions. Code revisions are considered to accommodate technological developments, address administra-
tive requirements, incorporate Code Cases, or to clarify Code intent.
(2) Code Cases. Code Cases represent alternatives or additions to existing Code rules. Code Cases are written as a
question and reply, and are usually intended to be incorporated into the Code at a later date. When used, Code Cases pre-
scribe mandatory requirements in the same sense as the text of the Code. However, users are cautioned that not all jur-
isdictions or owners automatically accept Code Cases. The most common applications for Code Cases are:
(-a) to permit early implementation of an approved Code revision based on an urgent need
(-b) to permit the use of a new material for Code construction
(-c) to gain experience with new materials or alternative rules prior to incorporation directly into the Code
(3) Code Interpretations. Code Interpretations provide clarification of the meaning of existing rules in the Code, and
are also presented in question and reply format. Interpretations do not introduce new requirements. In cases where ex-
isting Code text does not fully convey the meaning that was intended, and revision of the rules is required to support an
interpretation, an Intent Interpretation will be issued and the Code will be revised.
(b) The Code rules, Code Cases, and Code Interpretations established by the committees are not to be considered as
approving, recommending, certifying, or endorsing any proprietary or specific design, or as limiting in any way the free-
dom of manufacturers, constructors, or owners to choose any method of design or any form of construction that conforms
to the Code rules.
(c) Inquiries that do not comply with these provisions or that do not provide sufficient information for a committees
full understanding may result in the request being returned to the inquirer with no action.
2 INQUIRY FORMAT
Submittals to a committee shall include:
(a) Purpose. Specify one of the following:
(1) revision of present Code rules
(2) new or additional Code rules
(3) Code Case
(4) Code Interpretation
(b) Background. Provide the information needed for the committees understanding of the inquiry, being sure to include
reference to the applicable Code Section, Division, Edition, Addenda (if applicable), paragraphs, figures, and tables. Pre-
ferably, provide a copy of the specific referenced portions of the Code.
(c) Presentations. The inquirer may desire or be asked to attend a meeting of the committee to make a formal presenta-
tion or to answer questions from the committee members with regard to the inquiry. Attendance at a committee meeting
shall be at the expense of the inquirer. The inquirers attendance or lack of attendance at a meeting shall not be a basis for
acceptance or rejection of the inquiry by the committee.
3 CODE REVISIONS OR ADDITIONS
Requests for Code revisions or additions shall provide the following:
(a) Proposed Revisions or Additions. For revisions, identify the rules of the Code that require revision and submit a copy
of the appropriate rules as they appear in the Code, marked up with the proposed revision. For additions, provide the
recommended wording referenced to the existing Code rules.
(b) Statement of Need. Provide a brief explanation of the need for the revision or addition.
(c) Background Information. Provide background information to support the revision or addition, including any data or
changes in technology that form the basis for the request that will allow the committee to adequately evaluate the pro-
posed revision or addition. Sketches, tables, figures, and graphs should be submitted as appropriate. When applicable,
identify any pertinent paragraph in the Code that would be affected by the revision or addition and identify paragraphs
in the Code that reference the paragraphs that are to be revised or added.
4 CODE CASES
Requests for Code Cases shall provide a Statement of Need and Background Information similar to that defined in 3(b)
and 3(c), respectively, for Code revisions or additions. The urgency of the Code Case (e.g., project underway or imminent,
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
new procedure, etc.) must be defined and it must be confirmed that the request is in connection with equipment that will
bear the Certification Mark, with the exception of Section XI applications. The proposed Code Case should identify the
Code Section and Division, and be written as a Question and a Reply in the same format as existing Code Cases. Requests
for Code Cases should also indicate the applicable Code Editions and Addenda (if applicable) to which the proposed Code
Case applies.
5 CODE INTERPRETATIONS
(a) Requests for Code Interpretations shall provide the following:
(1) Inquiry. Provide a condensed and precise question, omitting superfluous background information and, when pos-
sible, composed in such a way that a yes or a no Reply, with brief provisos if needed, is acceptable. The question should
be technically and editorially correct.
(2) Reply. Provide a proposed Reply that will clearly and concisely answer the Inquiry question. Preferably, the Reply
should be yes or no, with brief provisos if needed.
(3) Background Information. Provide any background information that will assist the committee in understanding
the proposed Inquiry and Reply.
(b) Requests for Code Interpretations must be limited to an interpretation of a particular requirement in the Code or a
Code Case. The committee cannot consider consulting type requests such as the following:
(1) a review of calculations, design drawings, welding qualifications, or descriptions of equipment or parts to deter-
mine compliance with Code requirements;
(2) a request for assistance in performing any Code-prescribed functions relating to, but not limited to, material se-
lection, designs, calculations, fabrication, inspection, pressure testing, or installation;
(3) a request seeking the rationale for Code requirements.
6 SUBMITTALS
Submittals to and responses from the committees shall meet the following:
(a) Submittal. Inquiries from Code users shall be in English and preferably be submitted in typewritten form; however,
legible handwritten inquiries will also be considered. They shall include the name, address, telephone number, fax num-
ber, and e-mail address, if available, of the inquirer and be mailed to the following address:
Secretary
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee
Two Park Avenue
New York, NY 10016-5990
As an alternative, inquiries may be submitted via e-mail to: SecretaryBPV@asme.org.
(b) Response. The Secretary of the appropriate committee shall acknowledge receipt of each properly prepared inquiry
and shall provide a written response to the inquirer upon completion of the requested action by the committee.
13 PERSONNEL
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees,
Subgroups, and Working Groups
January 1, 2013
ADMINISTRATIVE COMMITTEE
J. G. Feldstein, Chair J. F. Henry
INTERNATIONAL INTEREST REVIEW GROUP
T. P. Pastor, Vice Chair U. R. Miller
J. S. Brzuszkiewicz, Staff Secretary V. Felix C. Minu
G. C. Park
R. W. Barnes Y.-G. Kim T. S. G. Narayannen
M. D. Rana
J. E. Batey S. H. Leong Y.-W. Park
T. L. Bedeaux B. F. Shelley W. Lin R. Reynaga
D. L. Berger W. J. Sperko O. F. Manafa P. Williamson
PROJECT TEAM ON HYDROGEN TANKS Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV I)
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
G. B. Komora B. C. Turczynski
Special Working Group on Computational Modeling for Explicit Working Group on Modernization (BPV 3C)
Dynamics (BPV III)
O. Jovall, Chair J.-B Domage
G. Bjorkman, Chair P. Y.-K. Shih J. McLean, Secretary N. Orbovic
D. J. Ammerman, Secretary S. D. Snow A. Adediran
C. T. Smith
G. Broz N. Alchaar
C.-F Tso M. A. Ugalde
J. Jordan J. F. Artuso
D. Molitoris M. C. Yaksh J. J. Braun S. Wang
J. Piotter U. Zencker J. Colinares U. Ricklefs, Contributing Member
COMMITTEE ON HEATING BOILERS (BPV IV) COMMITTEE ON NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION (BPV V)
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
T. P. Pastor T. Tahara, Delegate R. J. Basile S. C. Roberts
D. T. Peters W. S. Jacobs, Contributing Member D. K. Chandiramani J. R. Sims, Jr.
R. Mahadeen D. Srnic
U. R. Miller D. A. Swanson
T. W. Norton R. Uebel
T. P. Pastor K. K. Tam
Subgroup on Design (BPV VIII)
R. J. Basile, Chair S. C. Roberts
J. C. Sowinski, Vice Chair C. D. Rodery
Subgroup on Heat Transfer Equipment (BPV VIII)
M. D. Lower, Secretary S. C. Shah
O. A. Barsky D. A. Swanson R. Mahadeen, Chair P. Matkovics
M. R. Breach J. Vattappilly G. Aurioles, Sr., Vice Chair S. Mayeux
F. L. Brown R. A. Whipple F. E. Jehrio, Secretary U. R. Miller
J. R. Farr A. A. Gibbs, Delegate S. R. Babka T. W. Norton
B. F. Hantz K. Oyamada, Delegate J. H. Barbee K. Oyamada
C. E. Hinnant M. E. Papponetti, Delegate O. A. Barsky
D. Srnic
M. H. Jawad M. Faulkner, Corresponding I. G. Campbell
A. M. Voytko
D. L. Kurle Member A. Chaudouet
R. W. Mikitka C. S. Hinson, Corresponding M. D. Clark R. P. Wiberg
U. R. Miller Member J. I. Gordon F. Osweiller, Corresponding
K. Mokhtarian W. S. Jacobs, Corresponding M. J. Holtz Member
T. P. Pastor Member G. G. Karcher S. Yokell, Corresponding Member
M. D. Rana A. Selz, Corresponding Member D. L. Kurle R. Tiwari, Contributing Member
G. B. Rawls, Jr. K. K. Tam, Corresponding Member B. J. Lerch S. M. Caldwell, Honorary Member
Subgroup on High Pressure Vessels (BPV VIII) Task Group on Design (BPV VIII)
Working Group on Personnel Qualification and Surface Visual and Working Group on Design and Programs (SG-RRA) (BPV XI)
Eddy Current Examination (SG-NDE) (BPV XI) G. G. Elder, Chair E. B. Gerlach
J. T. Lindberg, Chair J. C. Spanner, Jr. S. B. Brown, Secretary D. R. Graham
D. R. Cordes, Secretary O. Bhatty G. F. Harttraft
J. T. Timm
S. E. Cumblidge R. Clow T. E. Hiss
M. C. Weatherly J. W. Collins H. Malikowski
N. Farenbaugh
D. O. Henry M. L. Whytsell R. R. Croft M. A. Pyne
J. W. Houf C. J. Wirtz E. V. Farrell, Jr. R. R. Stevenson
S. K. Fisher R. W. Swayne
J. M. Gamber R. A. Yonekawa
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
R. Fougerousse C. M. Ross Special Working Group on Reliability and Integrity Management
Program (BPV XI)
F. J. Schaaf, Jr., Chair D. R. Lee
Working Group on Pressure Testing (SG-WCS) (BPV XI) M. A. Lockwood, Secretary R. K. Miller
N. Broom P. M. Mills
D. W. Lamond, Chair T. R. Lupold
S. R. Doctor
J. M. Boughman, Secretary J. K. McClanahan M. N. Mitchell
J. Fletcher
Y.-K. Chung B. L. Montgomery A. T. Roberts III
M. R. Graybeal
T. Coste S. A. Norman
J. Grimm T. Roney
J. A. Doughty P. N. Passalugo
A. B. Hull R. W. Swayne
R. E. Hall J. A. Stevenson
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
W. L. Garfield, Chair M. Pitts C. S. Withers E. A. Whittle, Alternate
S. E. Benet, Secretary T. Rummel S. Yang H. L. Wiger, Alternate
T. W. Alexander
R. C. Sallash
A. N. Antoniou
S. Staniszewski
J. L. Freiler
C. H. Hochman K. L. Gilmore, Contributing Member COMMITTEE ON SAFETY VALVE REQUIREMENTS (BPV-SVR)
J. R. McGimpsey L. H. Strouse, Contributing Member
J. A. West, Chair R. J. Doelling
D. B. DeMichael, Vice Chair J. P. Glaspie
C. E. OBrien, Staff Secretary S. F. Harrison, Jr.
J. F. Ball W. F. Hart
S. Cammeresi D. Miller
J. A. Cox T. Patel
R. D. Danzy Z. Wang
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
1 GENERAL
Section III consists of Division 1, Division 2, Division 3, and Division 5. These Divisions are broken down into Subsec-
tions and are designated by capital letters preceded by the letter N for Division 1, by the letter C for Division 2, by the
letter W for Division 3, and by the letter H for Division 5. Each Subsection is published separately, with the exception
of those listed for Divisions 2, 3, and 5.
Subsection NCA General Requirements for Division 1 and Division 2
Appendices
Division 1
Subsection NB Class 1 Components
Subsection NC Class 2 Components
Subsection ND Class 3 Components
Subsection NE Class MC Components
Subsection NF Supports
Subsection NG Core Support Structures
Subsection NH Class 1 Components in Elevated Temperature Service
Division 2 Code for Concrete Containments
Subsection CC Concrete Containments
Division 3 Containments for Transportation and Storage of Spent Nuclear Fuel and High Level Radioactive Material and
Waste
Subsection WA General Requirements for Division 3
Subsection WB Class TC Transportation Containments
Subsection WC Class SC Storage Containments
Division 5 High Temperature Reactors
Subsection HA General Requirements
Subpart A Metallic Materials
Subpart B Graphite Materials
Subpart C Composite Materials
Subsection HB Class A Metallic Pressure Boundary Components
Subpart A Low Temperature Service
Subpart B Elevated Temperature Service
Subsection HC Class B Metallic Pressure Boundary Components
Subpart A Low Temperature Service
Subpart B Elevated Temperature Service
Subsection HF Class A and B Metallic Supports
Subpart A Low Temperature Service
Subsection HG Class A Metallic Core Support Structures
Subpart A Low Temperature Service
Subpart B Elevated Temperature Service
Subsection HH Class A Nonmetallic Core Support Structures
Subpart A Graphite Materials
Subpart B Composite Materials
2 SUBSECTIONS
Subsections are divided into Articles, subarticles, paragraphs, and, where necessary, subparagraphs and
subsubparagraphs.
3 ARTICLES
Articles are designated by the applicable letters indicated above for the Subsections followed by Arabic numbers, such
as NB-1000. Where possible, Articles dealing with the same topics are given the same number in each Subsection, except
NCA, in accordance with the following general scheme:
Article Number Title
1000 Introduction or Scope
2000 Material
3000 Design
4000 Fabrication and Installation
5000 Examination
6000 Testing
7000 Overpressure Protection
8000 Nameplates, Stamping With Certification Mark, and Reports
The numbering of Articles and the material contained in the Articles may not, however, be consecutive. Due to the fact
that the complete outline may cover phases not applicable to a particular Subsection or Article, the rules have been pre-
pared with some gaps in the numbering.
4 SUBARTICLES
Subarticles are numbered in units of 100, such as NB-1100.
5 SUBSUBARTICLES
Subsubarticles are numbered in units of 10, such as NB-2130, and generally have no text. When a number such as
NB-1110 is followed by text, it is considered a paragraph.
6 PARAGRAPHS
Paragraphs are numbered in units of 1, such as NB-2121.
7 SUBPARAGRAPHS
Subparagraphs, when they are major subdivisions of a paragraph, are designated by adding a decimal followed by one
or more digits to the paragraph number, such as NB-1132.1. When they are minor subdivisions of a paragraph, subpar-
agraphs may be designated by lowercase letters in parentheses, such as NB-2121(a).
8 SUBSUBPARAGRAPHS
Subsubparagraphs are designated by adding lowercase letters in parentheses to the major subparagraph numbers,
such as NB-1132.1(a). When further subdivisions of minor subparagraphs are necessary, subsubparagraphs are desig-
nated by adding Arabic numerals in parentheses to the subparagraph designation, such as NB-2121(a)(1).
9 REFERENCES
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
References used within Section III generally fall into one of the following four categories:
(a) References to Other Portions of Section III. When a reference is made to another Article, subarticle, or paragraph, all
numbers subsidiary to that reference shall be included. For example, reference to NB-3000 includes all material in Article
NB-3000; reference to NB-3200 includes all material in subarticle NB-3200; reference to NB-3230 includes all para-
graphs, NB-3231 through NB-3236.
(b) References to Other Sections. Other Sections referred to in Section III are the following:
(1) Section II, Materials. When a requirement for a material, or for the examination or testing of a material, is to be in
accordance with a specification such as SA-105, SA-370, or SB-160, the reference is to material specifications in Section II.
These references begin with the letter S.
(2) Section V, Nondestructive Examination. Section V references begin with the letter T and relate to the nondestruc-
tive examination of material or welds.
(3) Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications. Section IX references begin with the letter Q and relate to weld-
ing and brazing requirements.
(4) Section XI, Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components. When a reference is made to inser-
vice inspection, the rules of Section XI shall apply.
(c) Reference to Specifications and Standards Other Than Published in Code Sections
(1) Specifications for examination methods and acceptance standards to be used in connection with them are pub-
lished by the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). At the time of publication of Section III, some such spe-
cifications were not included in Section II of this Code. A reference to ASTM E94 refers to the specification so designated
by and published by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428.
(2) Dimensional standards covering products such as valves, flanges, and fittings are sponsored and published by
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers and approved by the American National Standards Institute.* When a pro-
duct is to conform to such a standard, for example ASME B16.5, the standard is approved by the American National Stan-
dards Institute. The applicable year of issue is that suffixed to its numerical designation in Table NCA-7100-1, for example
ASME B16.5-2003. Standards published by The American Society of Mechanical Engineers are available from ASME, 22
Law Drive, P.O. Box 2900, Fairfield, NJ 07007-2900.
(3) Dimensional and other types of standards covering products such as valves, flanges, and fittings are also pub-
lished by the Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry and are known as Standard Prac-
tices. When a product is required by these rules to conform to a Standard Practice, for example MSS SP-100, the Standard
Practice referred to is published by the Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.
(MSS), 127 Park Street, NE, Vienna, VA 22180. The applicable year of issue of such a Standard Practice is that suffixed
to its numerical designation in Table NCA-7100-1, for example MSS SP-89-2003.
(4) Specifications for welding and brazing materials are published by the American Welding Society (AWS), 8669
Doral Boulevard, Suite 130, Doral, FL 33166. Specifications of this type are incorporated in Section II and are identified
by the AWS designation with the prefix SF, for example SFA-5.1.
(5) Standards applicable to the design and construction of tanks and flanges are published by the American Petro-
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
leum Institute and have designations such as API-605. When documents so designated are referred to in Section III, for
example API-6051988, they are standards published by the American Petroleum Institute and are listed in Table NCA-
7100-1.
(d) References to Appendices. Section III uses two types of appendices that are designated as either Section III Appen-
dices or Subsection Appendices. Either of these appendices is further designated as either Mandatory or Nonmandatory
for use. Mandatory Appendices are referred to in the Section III rules and contain requirements that must be followed in
construction. Nonmandatory Appendices provide additional information or guidance when using Section III.
(1) Section III Appendices are contained in a separate book titled "Appendices." These appendices have the potential
for multiple subsection applicability. Mandatory Appendices are designated by a Roman numeral followed, when appro-
priate, by Arabic numerals to indicate various articles, subarticles, and paragraphs of the appendix, such as II-1500 or
XIII-2131. Nonmandatory Appendices are designated by a capital letter followed, when appropriate, by Arabic numerals
to indicate various articles, subarticles, and paragraphs of the appendix, such as D-1200 or Y-1440.
(2) Subsection Appendices are specifically applicable to just one subsection and are contained within that subsection.
Subsection-specific mandatory and nonmandatory appendices are numbered in the same manner as Section III Appen-
dices, but with a subsection identifier (e.g., NF, NH, D2, etc.) preceding either the Roman numeral or the capital letter
for a unique designation. For example, NF-II-1100 or NF-A-1200 would be part of a Subsection NF mandatory or nonman-
datory appendix, respectively. For Subsection CC, D2-IV-1120 or D2-D-1330 would be part of a Subsection CC mandatory
or nonmandatory appendix, respectively.
*
The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) was formerly known as the American Standards Association. Standards approved by the
Association were designated by the prefix ASA followed by the number of the standard and the year of publication. More recently, the American
National Standards Institute was known as the United States of America Standards Institute. Standards were designated by the prefix USAS
followed by the number of the standard and the year of publication. While the letters of the prefix have changed with the name of the organiza-
tion, the numbers of the standards have remained unchanged.
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
The 2013 Edition of this Code contains revisions in addition to the 2010 Edition with 2011 Addenda.
After publication of the 2013 Edition, Errata to the BPV Code may be posted on the ASME Web site to provide corrections
to incorrectly published items, or to correct typographical or grammatical errors in the BPV Code. Such Errata shall be
used on the date posted.
Information regarding Special Notices and Errata is published on the ASME Web site under the BPVC Resources page at
http://www.asme.org/kb/standards/publications/bpvc-resources.
Changes given below are identified on the pages by a margin note, (13), placed next to the affected area.
The Record Numbers listed below are explained in more detail in List of Changes in Record Number Order following this
Summary of Changes.
NOTE: Volume 62 of the Interpretations to Section III, Divisions 1 and 2, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
follows the last page of Subsection NCA.
LIST OF CHANGES IN RECORD NUMBER ORDER
There have been structural and stylistic changes to BPVC, starting with the 2011 Addenda, that should be noted to aid
navigating the contents. The following is an overview of the changes:
Footnotes
With the exception of those included in the front matter (roman-numbered pages), all footnotes are treated as end-
notes. The endnotes are referenced in numeric order and appear at the end of each BPVC section/subsection.
Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees
Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees has been moved to the front
matter. This information now appears in all Boiler Code Sections (except for Code Case books).
Cross-References
It is our intention to establish cross-reference link functionality in the current edition and moving forward. To facilitate
this, cross-reference style has changed. Cross-references within a subsection or subarticle will not include the designator/
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ARTICLE NF-1000
INTRODUCTION
NF-1100 SCOPE AND GENERAL (2) The exempt item shall be designed for the loading
REQUIREMENTS conditions and other requirements identified in the Design
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Specification.
13 NF-1110 ASPECTS OF CONSTRUCTION COVERED (3) Design Output Documents (NCA3550) shall indi-
BY THESE RULES cate items that are exempt.
(4) Materials, fabrication, and installation of the ex-
(a) Subsection NF contains rules for the material, de-
empt items shall comply with Design Output Documents.
sign, fabrication, examination, installation, and prepara-
tion of certification documents (Certificate of Compliance (5) Class 1 springs shall be inspected in accordance
and NS1 Certificate of Conformance) for supports for with NF-2520.
components and piping which are intended to conform (6) Washers shall comply with the requirements of
to the requirements for Class 1, 2, 3, and MC construction NF-2128(b) and NF-4700.
as set forth in Subsections NB, NC, ND, and NE, respec- (7) Wire rope shall comply with the requirements of
tively, of this Section. NF-2530 and Article NF-3000.
(b) They do not cover deterioration that may occur in (8) Compression spring end plates shall comply with
service as a result of corrosion, erosion, radiation effects, the requirements of Articles NF-3000, NF-4000, NF-5000,
or metallurgical instability of the materials (NCA1130). and NF-8000.
(c) Nuclear power plant supports1 for which the rules (9) Compression dynamic stops shall comply with the
are specified in this Subsection are those metal elements requirements of Articles NF-3000, NF-4000, NF-5000,
which transmit loads between components (NCA1210), and NF-8000.
including piping systems, and intervening elements and (10) Thread locking devices shall comply with the re-
the building structure. However, the term supports does quirements of NF-4725.1.
not encompass a structural element the sole function of (11) The means by which exempt items are attached
which is to carry dynamic loads caused by a postulated to supports shall comply with the applicable requirements
loss of pressure retaining integrity. of this Subsection.
(d) The Owner shall be responsible for assuring the ade-
quacy of the building structure and all intervening ele-
ments in the support load path in accordance with the NF-1120 RULES FOR SUPPORTS AND THEIR
requirements of NCA3240 and NCA3250. To the extent CLASSIFICATION
necessary, the support designer shall consider the struc-
NF-1121 Rules for Supports
tural interaction with intervening elements and the build-
ing structure. The rules of Subsection NF provide requirements for
(e) Except for the requirements listed in (1) through new construction and include consideration of mechanical
(11), the requirements of Subsection NF do not apply to stresses and effects which result from the constraint of
bearings, bushings, gaskets, hydraulic fluids, seals, shims, freeend displacements and anchor point motions defined
slide plates, retaining rings, wear shoes, springs, washers, in NF-3121.12 and NF-3121.13, but not thermal or peak
wire rope, compression spring end plates, thread locking stresses.
devices, cotter pins, sight glass assemblies, spring hanger
travel and hydro stops, nameplates, nameplate attachment
devices, or for compression dynamic stops used as stops2 NF-1122 Classification of Supports
for seismic and other dynamic loads that are designed pri- Supports shall be constructed to the requirements of
marily for compressive loading and are not connected to this Subsection that are applicable to the class of the com-
the support or pressure boundary. ponent, including piping system, they are intended to sup-
(1) The material of the exempt items shall be selected port. Supports may be optionally classified as permitted in
to tolerate the environmental conditions to which they NCA2134. When the components are optionally classified
will be exposed, such as temperature, fluids, humidity, to a higher class as permitted in NCA2134(d), the support
and irradiation. need not be classified to the higher class.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
building structure.
Figure NF-1214-1. The capacities of standard supports
(e) If the means by which the support is connected to may be determined using plate and shell analysis or linear
the building structure is a weld, the weld shall fall within analysis or load rating. Examples of standard supports are
the jurisdiction of this Subsection. (a) rigid supports consisting of anchors, guides, re-
(f) If the means by which the support is connected to straints, rolling or sliding supports, and rodtype hangers
the building structure is a bolted joint to a building struc- (b) constant and variable type spring hangers
tural steel member, the bolts shall fall within the jurisdic- (c) snubbers
tion of this Subsection. (d) sway braces and vibration dampeners
(e) structural attachments such as ears, shoes, lugs,
rings, clamps, slings, straps, and clevises
NF-1133 Boundary Between Supports and (f) dampers
Intervening Elements
NF-1215 Primary and Secondary Members
The jurisdictional boundary between supports and in-
tervening elements in the support load path is the surface Support members are also categorized as primary or
of the intervening elements. Supports may bear on or may secondary according to function. These member types
be welded, bolted, pinned, or clamped to intervening ele- are defined in the following paragraphs.
ments. The means by which supports are connected to in- (a) Primary Members. Primary members of supports are
tervening elements shall fall within the jurisdiction of this defined as those members designed to carry loads under
Subsection. any postulated load condition.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Figure NF-1132-1
Typical Examples of Jurisdictional Boundaries Between Piping Supports and the Building Structure
Building structure
Building structure
Building structure
NF
Building structure
Building structure
Building structure
NF
Connection in
accordance Snubber
Connection in
accordance with NF NF NF
with NF
Connection in
accordance
with NF
(c)
(a) (b)
Connection in
Building structure
accordance
with NF NF
NF
Concrete anchor
(d)
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Figure NF-1132-1
Typical Examples of Jurisdictional Boundaries Between Piping Supports and the Building Structure
(Cont'd)
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Figure NF-1132-1
Typical Examples of Jurisdictional Boundaries Between Piping Supports and the Building Structure
(Cont'd)
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Figure NF-1132-2
Typical Example of Jurisdictional Boundary Between Component Support and the Building Structure
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Figure NF-1214-1
Typical Standard Support Units
Variable Spring
Base Support Snubber
Variable
Spring Hanger
Vertical Type
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
ARTICLE NF-2000
MATERIAL
NF-2100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR Article. The requirements of this Article do not apply to
MATERIAL materials used as backing rings or backing strips in
welded joints.
NF-2110 SCOPE OF PRINCIPAL TERMS
EMPLOYED NF-2122 Special Requirements Conflicting With
(a) The term material as used in this Subsection is de- Permitted Material Specifications
fined in NCA9000. The term Material Organization (Me- (a) Special requirements stipulated in this Article shall
tallic) is defined in NCA9000. apply in lieu of the requirements of the material specifica-
(b) The requirements of this Article make reference to tions wherever the special requirements conflict with the
the term thickness. For the purpose intended, the following material specification requirements [NCA3856.3(d)].
definitions of nominal thickness apply: Where the special requirements include an examination,
(1) p la t e : the thickness is the dimension of the short test, or treatment which is also required by the material
transverse direction. specification, the examination, test, or treatment need be
(2) forgings: the thickness is the dimension defined as performed only once. Required nondestructive examina-
follows: tions shall be performed as specified for each product
form in NF-2500. Any examination, repair, test, or treat-
(-a) hollow forgings: the nominal thickness is mea-
ment required by the material specification or by this Ar-
sured between the inside and outside surfaces (radial
ticle may be performed by the Material Organization or the
thickness).
Certificate Holder, as provided in NF-4121.1. Pipe or tube
(-b) disk forgings (axial length less than the outside
material used under the rules of this Subsection need not
diameter): the nominal thickness is the axial length.
be hydrostatically or pneumatically tested, provided these
(-c) flat ring forgings (axial length less than the ra- materials are not used in a pressure retaining function.
dial thickness): for axial length 2 in. (50 mm), the axial (b) Copper and copperbased alloys shall not be used
length is the nominal thickness. For axial length >2 in. for structural members.
(50 mm), the radial thickness is the nominal thickness. (c) The stress rupture test of SA-453 and SA-638 for
(-d) rectangular solid forgings: the least rectangu- Grade 660 (UNS S66286) is not required for design tem-
lar dimension is the nominal thickness. peratures of 800F (427C) and below.
(3) castings: thickness, t , is defined as the largest
nominal thickness of the load carrying portion of the NF-2124 Size Ranges
casting. Material outside the limits of size or thickness given in
any specification in Section II may be used if the material
NF-2120 SUPPORT MATERIAL is in compliance with the other requirements of the speci-
fication and no size limitation is given in the rules for con-
13 NF-2121 Permitted Material Specifications
struction. In those specifications in which chemical
(a) Except as provided in (b) or NF-2128, material for composition or mechanical properties are indicated to
supports shall conform to the requirements of the specifi- vary with size or thickness, any material outside the spe-
cations for material listed in the tables of Section II, Part D, cification range shall be required to conform to the compo-
including all applicable footnotes in the table, applicable to sition and mechanical properties shown for the nearest
the Class of construction, as indicated in specified range [NCA3856.3(d)].
Table NF-2121(a)-1.
(b) The requirements of Article NF-2000 do not apply NF-2128 Bolting Material 13
to exempt items as indicated in NF-1110(e). Certificates (a) Material for bolts and studs shall conform to the re-
of Compliance (NF-2130) are not required for exempt quirements of one of the specifications listed in Section II,
items. Part D, Subpart 1, Table 3 or Table 4. Materials listed in
(c) Welding and brazing material used in manufacture Table 3 may be used for Class 2 and Class 3 supports
of items shall comply with an SFA Specification in Section and for Class 1 Standard Supports. Materials listed in
II, Part C, except as otherwise permitted in Section IX, and Table 4 may be used for Class 1 supports. Material for nuts
shall also comply with the applicable requirements of this shall conform to SA-194, SA-563, or to the requirements of
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
13 Table NF-2121(a)-1
Material Tables Required for Supports
Section II, Part D,
Table Y-1, Table
Section II, Part D, Section II, Part D, 4 [Note (1)], and
Tables 2A and Tables 1A and 1B, Table 3 [Note Section II, Part D,
2B, Design Stress Allowable Stress (2)], Yield Table U, Tensile
Intensity Values, Values, Strength Values, Strength Values,
Type and Class Sm S Sy Su
Plate and shell
Class 1 x x x
Class 2 and MC x x x
Class 3 x x x
Bolting (all classes) x x
Linear
Class 1 x x
Class 2 and MC x x
Class 3 x x
Bolting (all classes) x x
Standard support
Class 1 x (plate and shell) x (linear) x (All Types)
Class 2 x (plate and shell) x (linear) x (All Types)
Class 3 x (plate and shell) x (linear) x (All Types)
Bolting (all classes) x (linear) x (All Types)
Applicable Class Cl. 1 Cl. 2, Cl. 3, and MC All Classes All Classes
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Table Y2 of Section II, Part D, provides permanent strain limiting factor for plate and shelltype supports.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(b) Tables TE and TM of Section II, Part D, provide values of the coefficient of thermal expansion and modulus
of elasticity, respectively.
NOTES:
(1) When values are not provided in Table Y-1, tabulated values in Table 4 may be multiplied by 3 to arrive at
values that may be used for S y . Round up to the next higher 0.5 ksi (3.5 MPa).
(2) When values are not provided in Table Y-1, tabulated values in Table 3 may be multiplied by 1.5 to arrive at
values that may be used for S y . Round up to the next higher 0.5 ksi (3.5 MPa).
one of the specifications for nuts or bolting listed in Sec- shall be provided with Certified Material Test Reports
tion II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 3 and 4. Material for nuts when impact testing is required (NF-2311). Copies of
may also conform to the specification for suitable nuts these certificates shall be provided with the support.
identified in a permitted bolting specification. (b) Certificates of Compliance with the material specifi-
Table NF-2121(a)-1 provides the source for the yield cation, grade, class, and heat treated condition, as applic-
and tensile strength values required for design. able, or Certified Material Test Reports shall be provided
(b) Unless required by NF-4720, the use of washers is by the Material Organization for material for all other sup-
optional. When used, they shall be made of wrought mate- ports, Standard Supports, and secondary members of all
rial with mechanical properties compatible with the nuts types and Classes of supports.
with which they are to be employed. (c) When Design Documents, such as the Design Report
or Load Capacity Data Sheet, permit the use of alternative
materials for which certificates of compliance are per-
mitted, the alternative materials may be documented in
the Design Documents or the documentation for the sup-
NF-2130 CERTIFICATION OF MATERIAL
port in lieu of documenting the specific material used.
(a) Material used in the construction of supports shall The requirements of NF-2150 for identification of materi-
be certified. Certified Material Test Reports in accordance als shall apply.
with NCA3862 shall be provided for material used for pri- (d) When material Certificates of Compliance are per-
mary members for Class 1 Plate and Shell Type Supports, mitted, the support manufacturer shall transmit copies
and Class 1 Linear Type Supports. Material for other of the material Certificates of Compliance applicable to
Classes of supports and all Classes of Standard Supports each support. Alternatively, he shall execute and furnish
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
a single document certifying a listing of all material speci- calibrated pyrometric instruments. Heat treating shall be
fications involved in the shipment. When a single docu- performed under furnace loading conditions such that
ment is furnished, his quality program shall provide for the heat treatment is in accordance with the material spe-
his retention of the material Certificates of Compliance cification and the rules of this Subsection.
for each of the materials incorporated into the supports.
(b) If cooling rate data for the material and cooling rate product are simulated in accordance with NF-2212.2(b),
control devices for the test specimens are available, the the dimensions of the coupon shall not be less than
test specimens may be heat treated in the device to repre- 3t 3t t , where t is the nominal material thickness.
sent the material, provided that the provisions of (a) are
met.
(c) When any of the specific procedures described in NF-2223 Forgings
NF-2220 are used, faster cooling rates at the edges may NF-2223.1 Location of Coupons. Coupons shall be ta-
be compensated for by ken so that specimens shall have their longitudinal axes at
(1) taking the test specimens at least t from a least 1/4t from any surface and with the midlength of the
quenched edge, where t equals the material thickness specimens at least t from any second surface, where t is
(2) attaching a steel pad at least t wide by a partial the maximum heat treated thickness. A thermal buffer as
penetration weld (which completely seals the buffered described in NF-2212.2(c) may be used to achieve these
surface) to the edge where specimens are to be removed conditions, unless cooling rates applicable to the bulk for-
or gings are simulated as otherwise provided in NF-2212.2.
(3) using thermal barriers or insulation at the edge
NF-2223.2 Very Thick and Complex Forgings. Test
where specimens are to be removed
coupons for forgings that are both very thick and complex,
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
It shall be demonstrated (and this information shall be
such as trunnions, support forgings, flanges, and other
included in the Certified Material Test Report) that the
complex forgings that are contour shaped or machined
cooling rates are equivalent to (a) or (b).
to essentially the finished product configuration prior to
heat treatment, may be removed from prolongations or
NF-2220 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING TEST other stock provided on the product. The Certificate
COUPONS AND SPECIMENS FOR Holder shall specify the surfaces of the finished product
QUENCHED AND TEMPERED MATERIAL subjected to high tensile stresses in service. The coupons
NF-2221 General Requirements shall be taken so that specimens shall have their longitudi-
nal axes at a distance below the nearest heattreated sur-
The procedure for obtaining impact test specimens for face, equivalent to at least the greatest distance that the
quenched and tempered material is related to the product indicated high tensile stress surface will be from the near-
form. Coupon and specimen location shall be as required est surface during heat treatment, and with the midlength
by the material specification, except as stated in the fol- of the specimens a minimum of twice this distance from a
lowing paragraphs of this Subarticle. References to dimen- second heattreated surface. In any case, the longitudinal
sions signify nominal values. axes of the specimens shall not be nearer than 3/4 in.
(19 mm) to any heattreated surface and the midlength
NF-2222 Plates of the specimens shall be at least 11/2 in. (38 mm) from
NF-2222.1 Number of Tension Test Coupons. The any heattreated surface.
number of tension test coupons required shall be in accor- NF-2223.3 Coupons From Separately Produced Test
dance with the material specification and with SA-20, ex- Forgings. Test coupons representing forgings from one
cept that from carbon steel plates weighing 42,000 lb heat and one heat treatment lot may be taken from a sepa-
(19 000 kg) and over and alloy steel plates weighing rately forged piece under the conditions given in (a)
40,000 lb (18 000 kg) and over, two tension test coupons through (e).
shall be taken, one representing the top end of the plate
(a) The separate test forging shall be of the same heat of
and one representing the bottom end of the plate.
material and shall be subjected to substantially the same
NF-2222.2 Orientation and Location of Coupons. reduction and working as the production forging it
Coupons shall be taken so that specimens shall have their represents.
longitudinal axes at least 1/4t from a rolled surface and (b) The separate test forging shall be heat treated in the
with the midlength of the specimen at least t from any same furnace charge and under the same conditions as the
heat treated edge, where t is the nominal thickness of production forging.
the material. The orientation of the coupons shall be as (c) The separate test forging shall be of the same nom-
specified in the material specification. inal thickness as the production forging.
NF-2222.3 Requirements for Separate Test Cou- (d) Test coupons for simple forgings shall be taken so
pons. Where a separate test coupon is used to represent that specimens shall have their longitudinal axes at the re-
the support material, it shall be of sufficient size to ensure gion midway between midthickness and the surface and
that the cooling rate of the region from which the test cou- with the midlength of the specimens no nearer to any heat
pons are removed represents the cooling rate of the mate- treated edge than a distance equal to the forging thickness,
rial at least 1/4t deep and t from any edge of the product. except when the thicknesslength ratio of the production
Unless cooling rates applicable to the bulk pieces or forging does not permit, in which case a production
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
forging shall be used as the test forging and the midlength (a) The separate test coupon representing castings from
of the specimens shall be at the midlength of the test one heat and one heat treated lot shall be of the same heat
forgings. of material and shall be subjected to substantially the
(e) Test coupons for complex forgings shall be taken in same foundry practices as the production casting it
accordance with NF-2223.2. represents.
(b) The separate test coupon shall be heat treated in the
NF-2224 Bars and Bolting Material same furnace charge and under the same conditions as the
NF-2224.1 Location of Coupons. Coupons shall be ta- production casting, unless cooling rates applicable to the
ken so that specimens shall have their longitudinal axes at bulk castings are simulated in accordance with NF-2212.2.
least 1/4t from the outside or rolled surface and with the (c) The separate test coupon shall not be less than
midlength of the specimens at least t from a heat treated 3t 3t t , where t equals the nominal thickness of the
end, where t is either the bar diameter or thickness. casting. Test specimens shall be taken with their longitudi-
nal axes at the region midway between midthickness and
NF-2224.2 Bolting Material. For bolting material, the
the surface and with the midlength of the specimens no
coupons shall be taken in conformance with the applicable
nearer any heat treated edge than a distance equal to
material specification and with the midlength of the speci-
the casting thickness.
men at least one diameter or thickness from a heat treated
end. When the studs, nuts, or bolts are not of sufficient NF-2226.4 Castings Machined or Cast to Finished
length, the midlength of the specimen shall be at the mid- Configuration Before Heat Treatment. In lieu of the re-
length of the studs, nuts, or bolts. The studs, nuts, or bolts quirements of NF-2226.1, NF-2226.2, or NF-2226.3, test
selected to provide test coupon material shall be identical coupons may be removed from prolongations or other
with respect to the quenched contour and size, except for stock provided on the product. The coupons shall be taken
length, which shall equal or exceed the length of the repre- so that specimens shall have their longitudinal axes at a
sented studs, nuts, or bolts. distance below the nearest heattreated surface equivalent
at least to the greatest distance that the indicated high ten-
NF-2225 Tubular Products and Fittings sile stress surface will be from the nearest surface during
heat treatment and with the midlength of the specimens a
NF-2225.1 Location of Coupons. Coupons shall be ta-
minimum of twice this distance from a second heat
ken so that specimens shall have their longitudinal axes at
treated surface. In any case, the longitudinal axes of the
least 1/4t from the inside or outside surface and with the
specimens shall be at least 3/4 in. (19 mm) from any heat
midlength of the specimens at least t from a heat treated
end, where t is the nominal wall thickness of the tubular treated surface and the midlength of the specimens shall
product. be at least 11/2 in. (38 mm) from any second heattreated
surface. The Certificate Holder shall specify the surfaces of
NF-2225.2 Separately Produced Coupons Repre- the finished product subjected to high tensile stresses in
senting Fittings. Separately produced test coupons repre- service.
senting fittings may be used. When separately produced
coupons are used, the requirements of NF-2223.3 shall NF-2227 Rolled Shapes
be met.
For rolled shapes, the coupons shall be taken so that
NF-2226 Castings specimens shall have their longitudinal axes on a line re-
presenting the center of the thickest element of the shape
NF-2226.1 Castings With 2 in. (50 mm) Maximum
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
and with the midlength of the specimen at least t from a
Thickness and Less. For castings with a maximum thick- heat treated end.
ness of 2 in. (50 mm) and less, the specimens shall be ta-
ken from either the standard separately cast coupons or
the casting, in accordance with the material specification. NF-2300 FRACTURE TOUGHNESS
NF-2226.2 Castings With Thicknesses Exceeding 2 REQUIREMENTS FOR MATERIAL
in. (50 mm) Maximum Thickness. For castings exceeding
a thickness of 2 in. (50 mm), the coupons shall be taken
NF-2310 MATERIAL TO BE IMPACT TESTED
from the casting (or an extension of it) so that specimens NF-2311 Supports for Which Impact Testing of
shall have their longitudinal axes at least 1/4t of the maxi- Material Is Required4
mum heat treated thickness from any surface and with the (a) Support materials shall be impact tested in accor-
midlength of the specimens at least t from any second sur- dance with the requirements listed below.
face. A thermal buffer may be used [NF-2212.2(c)(3)]. (1) Attachments to the component or piping shall
NF-2226.3 Separately Cast Test Coupons for Cast- meet the requirements for impact testing stipulated in
ings With Thicknesses Exceeding 2 in. (50 mm). In lieu the applicable Subsection.
of the requirements of NF-2226.2, separately cast test cou- (2) Class 1, 2, 3, and MC component supports shall
pons may be used under the conditions of (a) through (c). meet the requirements of NF-2300.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
section steel [thickness greater than 21/2 in. (64 mm)]. Values
hardened austenitic Grade 660 (UNS S66286). for sections less than 21/2 in. (64 mm) thick are held constant
(6) Nonferrous materials. until additional data are obtained.
(3) T N D T = temperature at or above nilductility transition tem-
(7) Material for supports when the maximum stress perature (ASTM E208); T N D T is 10F (5.6C) below the tem-
does not exceed 6,000 psi (40 MPa) tension or is perature at which at least two specimens show nobreak
compressive. performance.
(8) Rolled structural shapes, when the thickness of a (4) Materials made to a fine grain melting practice.
flange is 5/8 in. (16 mm) or less.
(9) Materials for Class 1, 2, or MC supports, listed in
Table NF-2311(b)-1, for thicknesses 21/2 in. (64 mm) and NF-2320 IMPACT TEST PROCEDURES
less when the Lowest Service Temperature 5 is at least NF-2321 Charpy VNotch Tests
30F (15C) above the tabulated temperature. This exemp-
tion from impact testing does not apply to either the weld The Charpy Vnotch test (Cv), when required, shall be
metal (NF-2430) or the weld procedure qualification performed in accordance with SA-370. Specimens shall
(NF-4335). be in accordance with SA-370, Figure 11, Type A. A test
shall consist of a set of three fullsize 10 mm 10 mm spe-
(10) Materials for Class 3 supports, l isted in
cimens. The lateral expansion and absorbed energy, as ap-
Table NF-2311(b)-1, for thicknesses 21/2 in. (64 mm) and
plicable, and the test temperature, as well as the
less, when the Lowest Service Temperature is equal to
orientation and location of all tests performed to meet
or greater than the tabulated temperature. This exemption
the requirements of NF-2330 shall be reported in the Cer-
from impact testing does not apply to either the weld me-
tified Material Test Report.
tal ( NF-2430) or the weld procedure qualification
(NF-4335).
NF-2322 Location and Orientation of Test
(11) Materials for Class 2 and MC supports for which Specimens
the Lowest Service Temperature exceeds 150F (65C).
Impact test specimens for quenched and tempered ma-
(12) Materials for Class 3 supports for which the Low-
terial shall be removed from the locations and orientation
est Service Temperature exceeds 100F (38C).
specified for tensile test specimens in each product form
(13) Materials for Class 2, 3, and MC supports for in NF-2220 except that for plates the orientation of the im-
which the Lowest Service Temperature (LST) is equal or pact test specimens shall be longitudinal. For material in
above the Minimum Design Metal Temperature of other heat treated conditions, impact test specimens shall
Figure NF-2311(b)-1 for the materials listed and the ap- be removed from the locations and orientations specified
plicable material thicknesses. for tensile test specimens in the material specification ex-
(c) The Design Specification (NCA3250) shall state the cept that for plates the orientation of the impact speci-
Lowest Service Temperature (LST) for the support and the mens shall be longitudinal, and for structural shapes the
designated impact test temperature, when required. location and orientation of the impact test specimens shall
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Figure NF-2311(b)-1
Impact Test Exemption Curves for Materials for Class 2, 3, and MC Supports
140 (60)
120 (50)
100 (38)
Minimum Design Metal Temperature, F (C)
A*
80 (27)
B*
60 (15)
40 (5)
C
20 (7)
D
0 (18)
20 (30)
40 (40)
50 (46)
60 (51)
Impact testing required
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
80 (62)
0.625 (16) 1(25) 2 (50) 3 (75) 4 (100) 5 (125) 6 (150)
Nominal Thickness, in. (mm)
[Limited to 4 in. (100 mm) for welded construction]
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Curve A all carbon and all low alloy steel plates, structural shapes, and bars not listed in Curves B, C, and D below
(b) Curve B
(1) SA-285 Grades A and B
(a) SA-414 Grade A
(b) SA-442 Grade 55 > 1 in. (25 mm) if not to fine grain practice and normalized
(c) SA-442 Grade 60 if not to fine grain practice and normalized
(d) SA-515 Grades 55 and 60
(e) SA-516 Grades 65 and 70 if not normalized
(f) SA-612 if not normalized
(g) SA-662 Grade B if not normalized
(h) SA-724 if not normalized
(2) all materials of Curve A if produced to fine grain practice and normalized which are not listed for Curves C and D below;
(3) except for bolting [see (e) below], plates, structural shapes, and bars, all other product forms (such as pipe, fittings, and tubing) not
listed for Curves C and D below
(c) Curve C
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Figure NF-2311(b)-1
Impact Test Exemption Curves for Materials for Class 2, 3, and MC Supports (Cont'd)
GENERAL NOTES (CONT'D):
(1) SA-182 Grades 21 and 22 if normalized and tempered
(a) SA-302 Grades C and D
(b) SA-336 Grades F21 and F22 if normalized and tempered
(c) SA-387 Grades 21 and 22 if normalized and tempered
(d) SA-442 Grade 55 1 in. (25 mm) if not to fine grain practice and normalized
(e) SA-516 Grades 55 and 60 if not normalized
(f) SA-533 Grades B and C
(g) SA-662 Grade A;
(2) all material of Curve B if produced to fine grain practice and normalized and not listed for Curve D below
(d) Curve D
(a) SA-203
(b) SA-442 if to fine grain practice and normalized
(c) SA-508 Class 1
(d) SA-516 if normalized
(e) SA-524 Classes 1 and 2
(f) SA-537 Classes 1 and 2
(g) SA-612 if normalized
(h) SA-662 if normalized
(i) SA-724 if normalized
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(e) For bolting the following impact test exemption temperature shall apply:
Spec. No. Grade Impact Test Exemption Temperature, F (C)
SA-193 B5 20 (30)
B7 40 (40)
B7M 50 (45)
B16 20 (30)
SA-307 B 20 (30)
SA-325 1 20 (30)
SA-354 BB 20 (30)
BC 0 (18)
BD +20 (7)
SA-449 20 (30)
Table NF-2331(a)-4
Required Cv Energy Values for Class 1 Support Material Other Than Bolting
Customary Units
Energy, ftlb for Base Materials of Specified Minimum Yield Strength, ksi
55 ksi or Below Over 55 ksi to 75 ksi, Incl. Over 75 ksi to 105 ksi, Incl.
Nominal Wall Thickness, in. Average of 3 Lowest 1 of 3 Average of 3 Lowest 1 of 3 Average of 3 Lowest 1 of 3
5
/8 or less [Note (1)]
Over 5/8 to 1, incl. [Note (2)] 15 10 20 15 25 20
Over 1 [Note (2)] 25 20 30 25 35 30
SI Units
Energy, J for Base Materials of Specified Minimum Yield Strength, MPa
380 MPa or Below Over 380 MPa to 515 MPa, Incl. Over 515 MPa to 725 MPa, Incl.
Nominal Wall Thickness, mm Average of 3 Lowest 1 of 3 Average of 3 Lowest 1 of 3 Average of 3 Lowest 1 of 3
16 or less [Note (1)]
Over 16 to 25, incl. [Note (2)] 20 14 27 20 34 27
Over 25 [Note (2)] 34 27 41 34 47 41
NOTES:
(1) No test required.
(2) Where weld metal tests of NF-2400 are made to these requirements, the impact energy shall conform to the requirements of either
of the base materials being joined.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
each heat of each nominal shape size, excluding length, in NF-2350 RETESTS
each furnace lot. For shapes heat treated in a continuous
furnace, a lot shall not exceed 15 tons (14 000 kg). NF-2351 Retests for Class 1, 2, 3, and MC Material
Other Than Bolting
NF-2344 Tubular Products and Fittings
(a) For Charpy Vnotch tests required by NF-2331 to
On products that are seamless or welded without filler
metal, one test shall be made from each lot. On products meet the acceptance standards of Tables NF-2331(a)-1,
which are welded with filler metal, one additional test NF-2331(a)-2, and NF-2331(a)-3, respectively, one retest
with the specimens taken from the weld area shall also at the same temperature may be conducted, provided
be made on each lot. A lot shall be defined as stated in (1) the average value of the test results meets the
the applicable material specification, but in no case shall minimum requirements,
a lot consist of products from more than one heat of mate- (2) not more than one specimen per test is below the
rial and of more than one diameter, with the nominal minimum requirements, and
thickness of any product included not exceeding that to
(3) the specimens not meeting the minimum require-
be impact tested by more than 1/4 in. (6 mm); such a lot
ments are not lower than 5 mils (0.13 mm) below the spe-
shall be in a single heat treatment load or in the same con-
tinuous run in a continuous furnace controlled within a cified requirements.
50F (28C) range and equipped with recording A retest consists of two additional specimens taken as
pyrometers. near as practicable to the failed specimens. For acceptance
of the retests, both specimens shall meet the minimum
NF-2345 Bolting Material requirements.
One test shall be made for each lot of material where a (b) For Charpy Vnotch tests required by NF-2331 to
lot is defined as one heat of material heat treated in one meet the acceptance standards of Table NF-2331(a)-4,
charge or as one continuous operation, not to exceed the one retest at the same temperature may be conducted
following (in weight): provided
Diameter Weight
(1) the average value of the test results meets the
Average of 3 requirements specified.
13/4 in. (44 mm) and less 1,500 lb (700 kg)
Over 13/4 in. to 21/2 in. (44 mm to 64 mm) 3,000 lb (1 350 kg) (2) not more than one specimen per test is below the
1
Over 2 /2 in. to 5 in. (64 mm to 125 mm) 6,000 lb (2 700 kg) Lowest 1 of 3 requirements specified.
Over 5 in. (125 mm) 10,000 lb (4 500 kg) (3) the specimen not meeting the requirements is not
lower than 5 ftlb (7 J) below the Lowest 1 of 3 require-
ments specified.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Figure NF-2331(a)-1
Required Cv Energy Values for Class 2 and MC Support Material Other Than Bolting
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
0.625 (16)
50 (68)
Cv, ft-lb (J) (Average of Three Specimens)
40 (54)
Minimum specified
yield strength
75 ksi (515 MPa)
20 (27)
38 ksi (260 MPa)
15 (20)
10 (14)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Interpolation between yield strengths shown is permitted.
(b) The lowest of three specimens tested shall not be less than 5 ft-lbf (7 J) below the average
value required.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Figure NF-2331(a)-2
Required Cv Energy Values for Class 3 support Material Other Than Bolting
0.625 (16)
50 (68)
Cv, ft-lb (J) (Average of Three Specimens)
40 (54)
Minimum specified
yield strength
75 ksi (515 MPa)
20 (27)
38 ksi (260 MPa)
15 (20)
10 (14)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Interpolation between yield strengths shown is permitted.
(b) The lowest of three specimens tested shall not be less than 5 ft-lbf (7 J) below the average
value required.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
may be subsequently subdivided into quantities to which practice of one splice maximum per coil. A chemical analy-
the liquid binders may be added to produce a number of sis need be taken from only one end of rod coils furnished
wet mixes as in (c). by mills prohibiting spliced coil practice.
(b) A dry blend is defined as one or more dry batches (2) Carbon, manganese, silicon, and other intention-
mixed in a mixing vessel and combined proportionately ally added elements shall be determined to identify the
to produce a uniformity of mixed ingredients equal to that material to ensure that it conforms to the SFA or users
obtained by mixing the same total amount of dry ingredi- material specification.
ents at one time in one mixing vessel. (3) Each container of wire shall be coded for identifi-
(c) A wet mix is defined as the combination of a dry cation and traceability to the lot, production period, shift,
batch or dry blend [(a) and (b), respectively] and liquid line, and analysis of rod used to make the wire.
binder ingredients at one time in one mixing vessel. (g) A lot of submerged arc or electroslag flux is defined
(d) A lot of covered, fluxcored, or fabricated electrodes is as the quantity of flux produced from the same combina-
defined as the quantity of electrodes produced from the tion of raw materials under one production schedule.
same combination of heat of metal and dry batch, dry (h) A dry blend of supplementary powdered filler metal is
blend, or chemically controlled mixes of flux or core mate- defined as one or more mixes of material produced in a
rials. Alternatively, a lot of covered, fluxcored, or fabri- continuous period, not to exceed 24 hr and not to exceed
cated electrodes may be considered one type and size of 20,000 lb (9 000 kg) from chemically controlled mixes of
electrode, produced in a continuous period, not to exceed powdered filler metal, provided each container of pow-
24 hr and not to exceed 100,000 lb (45 000 kg), from che- dered metal is coded for identification and traceable to
mically controlled tube, wire, or strip and a dry batch, a the production period, the shift, and the mixing vessel. A
dry blend, or chemically controlled mixes of flux, provided chemically controlled mix of powdered filler metal is de-
each container of welding materials is coded for identifica- fined as powdered filler metal material that has been che-
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
tion and traceable to the production period, the shift, line, mically analyzed to assure that it conforms to the percent
and analysis range of both the mix and the rod, tube, or allowable variation from the powdered filler metal manu-
strip used to make the electrode. facturers standard, for each chemical element, for that
(1) Chemically controlled tube, wire, or strip is defined type of powdered filler metal. A chemical analysis shall
as consumable tube, wire, or strip material supplied on be made on each mix made in an individual mixing vessel
coils with maximum of one slice per coil that has been che- after blending. The chemical analysis range of the supple-
mically analyzed to assure that the material conforms to mental powdered filler shall be the same as that of the
the electrode manufacturers chemical control limits for welding electrode, and the ratio of powder to electrode
the specific type of electrode. Both ends of each coil shall used to make the test coupon shall be the maximum per-
be chemically analyzed except that those coils which are mitted for production welding.
splice free need only be analyzed on one end of the coil.
(2) Chemically controlled mixes of flux are defined as
NF-2430 WELD METAL TESTS
flux material that has been chemically analyzed to assure
that it conforms to the percent allowable variation from NF-2431 Mechanical Properties Test
the electrode manufacturers standard for each chemical Tensile and impact tests shall be made, in accordance
element for that type electrode. A chemical analysis shall with this paragraph, of welding materials which are used
be made on each mix made in an individual mixing vessel to join PNos. 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, and 11 base materials in
after blending. any combination, with the exceptions listed in (a) through
(e) A heat of bare electrode, rod, wire, or consumable in- (d).
sert is defined as the material produced from the same (a) austenitic stainless steel and nonferrous welding
melt of metal. material used to join the listed PNumbers
(f) Alternatively, for carbon and low alloy steel bare (b) consumable inserts (backing filler material)
electrode, rod, wire, or consumable inserts for use with
(c) welding material used for GTAW root deposits with
SAW, OFW, GMAW, GTAW, PAW, and EGW processes, a
a maximum of two layers
h e a t may be defined as either the material produced from
(d) welding material to be used for the welding of base
the same melt of metal or the material produced from one
materials exempted from impact testing by
type and size of wire when produced in a continuous per-
NF-2311(b)(1) through NF-2311(b)(8) and
iod, not to exceed 24 hr and not to exceed 100,000 lb
NF-2311(b)(11) and NF-2311(b)(12) shall likewise be ex-
(45 000 kg), from chemically controlled wire, subject to
empted from the impact testing required by this
requirements of (1), (2), and (3).
paragraph
(1) For the chemical control of the product of the rod
mill, coils shall be limited to a maximum of one splice prior NF-2431.1 General Test Requirements. The welding
to processing the wire. Chemical analysis shall be made test coupon shall be made in accordance with (a) through
from a sample taken from both ends of each coil of mill (f) using each process with which the weld material will be
coiled rod furnished by mills permitting spliced coil used in production welding.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
(a) Test coupons shall be of sufficient size and thickness the base material. Where different requirements exist for
that the test specimens required herein can be removed. the two base materials, the weld metal may conform to
(b) The weld metal to be tested for all processes except either of the two requirements.
electroslag welding shall be deposited in such a manner as NF-2431.2 Standard Test Requirements. In lieu of
to eliminate substantially the influence of the base materi- the use of the General Test Requirements specified in
al on the results of the tests. Weld metal to be used with NF-2431.1, tensile and impact tests may be made in accor-
the electroslag process shall be deposited in such a man- dance with this subparagraph where they are required for
ner as to conform to one of the applicable Welding Proce- mild and low alloy steel covered electrodes; the material
dure Specifications (WPS) for production welding. The combinations to require weld material testing, as listed
base material shall conform with the requirements of Sec- in NF-2431, shall apply for this Standard Test Require-
tion IX, QW403.1 or QW403.4, as applicable. ments option. The limitations and testing under this Stan-
(c) The welding of the test coupon shall be performed dard Test option shall be in accordance with (a) through
within the range of preheat and interpass temperatures (f).
which will be used in production welding. Coupons shall (a) Testing to the requirements of this subparagraph
be tested in the aswelded condition or they shall be tested shall be limited to electrode classifications included in
in the applicable postweld heat treated condition when specifications SFA5.1 or SFA5.5.
the production welds are to be postweld heat treated. (b) The test assembly required by SFA5.1 or SFA5.5, as
The postweld heat treatment holding time 3 shall be at applicable, shall be used for test coupon preparation, ex-
least 80% of the maximum time to be applied to the weld cept that it shall be increased in size to obtain the number
metal in production application. The total time for post- of C v specimens required by NF-2331(a), where
weld heat treatment of the test coupon may be applied applicable.
in one heating cycle. The cooling rate from the postweld
(c) The welding of the test coupon shall conform to the
heat treatment temperature shall be of the same order
requirements of the SFA Specification for the classification
as that applicable to the weld metal in the support. In ad-
of electrode being tested. Coupons shall be tested in the
dition, weld coupons for weld metal to be used with the
aswelded condition and also in the postweld heat treated
electroslag process that are tested in the aswelded condi-
condition. The postweld heat treatment temperatures
tion, or following a postweld heat treatment within the
shall be in accordance with Table NF-4622.1-1 for the ap-
holding temperature ranges of Table NF-4622.1-1 or Table
plicable PNumber equivalent. The time at postweld heat
NF-4622.4(c)-1, shall have a thickness within the range of
treatment temperature shall be 8 hr (this qualifies post-
0.5 to 1.1 times the thickness of the welds to be made in
weld heat treatments of 10 hr or less). When the postweld
production. Electroslag weld coupons to be tested follow-
heat treatment of the production weld exceeds 10 hr, or
ing a postweld heat treatment, which will include heating
the PWHT temperature is other than that required above,
the coupon to a temperature above the Holding Tempera-
the general test of NF-2431.1 shall be used.
ture Range of Table NF-4622.1-1 for the type of material
being tested, shall have a thickness within the range of 0.9 (d) The tensile and Cv specimens shall be located and
to 1.1 times the thickness of the welds to be made in prepared in accordance with the requirements of
production. SFA5.1 or SFA5.5, as applicable.
(e) One all weld metal tensile specimen shall be tested
(d) The tensile specimens, and the Cv impact specimens
and shall meet the specified minimum tensile strength re-
where required, shall be located and prepared in accor-
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
All other filler metal Filler metal or Filler metal or Weld
chemical elements to be determined, the composition re-
weld deposit weld deposit deposit
quirements of the weld metal, and the recording of results
of the chemical analysis shall be in accordance with (a)
through (c).
(a) Welding material of ferrous alloy ANo. 8 (Section IX,
chemical analysis performed either on the filler metal or QW442) shall be analyzed for the elements listed in
on a weld deposit made with the filler metal in accordance Table NF-2432.2(a)-1 and for any other elements specified
with (c) or (d). either in the welding material specification referenced by
(b) ANo. 8 welding material to be used with other than the Welding Procedure Specification or in the Welding
the GTAW and PAW processes and other welding material Procedure Specification.
to be used with other than the GTAW, PAW, or GMAW pro- (b) The chemical composition of the weld metal or filler
cess shall have chemical analysis performed on a weld de- metal shall conform to the welding material specification
posit of the material or combination of materials being for elements having specified percentage composition lim-
certified in accordance with (c) or (d). The removal of che- its. Where the Welding Procedure Specification contains a
mical analysis samples shall be from an undiluted weld de- modification of the composition limits of SFA or other re-
posit made in accordance with (c). As an alternative, the ferenced welding material specifications, or provides lim-
deposit shall be made in accordance with (d) for material its for additional elements, these composition limits of the
that will be used for corrosion resistant overlay cladding. Welding Procedure Specification shall apply for
Where the Welding Procedure Specification or the welding acceptability.
material specification specifies percentage composition (c) The results of the chemical analysis shall be re-
limits for analysis, it shall state that the specified limits ap- ported in accordance with NCA3862.1. Elements listed
ply for either the filler metal analysis or the undiluted in Table NF-2432.2(a)-1 but not specified in the welding
weld deposit analysis or for in situ cladding deposit analy- material specification or Welding Procedure Specification
sis in conformance with the above required certification shall be reported for information only.
testing.
(c) The preparation of samples for chemical analysis of NF-2433 Delta Ferrite Determination
undiluted weld deposits shall comply with the method gi-
A determination of delta ferrite shall be performed on
ven in the applicable SFA Specification. Where a weld de-
ANo. 8 weld material (Section IX, QW442) backing filler
posit method is not provided by the SFA Specification, the
metal (consumable inserts); bare electrode, rod, or wire
sample shall be removed from a weld pad, groove, or other
filler metal; or weld metal, except that delta ferrite deter-
test weld7 made using the welding process that will be fol-
minations are not required for SFA5.4, Type 1682, or
lowed when the welding material or combination of weld-
ANo. 8 weld filler metal to be used for weld metal
ing materials being certified is consumed. The weld for
cladding.
ANo. 8 material to be used with the GMAW or EGW pro-
cess shall be made using the shielding gas composition NF-2433.1 Method. Delta ferrite determinations of
specified in the Welding Procedure Specification that will welding material, including consumable insert material,
be followed when the material is consumed. The test sam- shall be made using a magnetic measuring instrument
ple for ESW shall be removed from the weld metal of the and weld deposits made in accordance with (b). Alterna-
mechanical properties test coupon. Where a chemical ana- tively, the delta ferrite determinations for welding materi-
lysis is required for a welding material which does not als may be performed by the use of chemical analysis of
have a mechanical properties test requirement, a chemical NF-2432 in conjunction with Figure NF-2433.1-1.
analysis test coupon shall be prepared as required by
NF-2431.1(c), except that heat treatment of the coupon
is not required and the weld coupon thickness require- Table NF-2432.2(a)-1
ments of NF-2431.1(c) do not apply. Welding Material Chemical Analysis
(d) The alternate method provided in (b) for the pre- Materials Elements
paration of samples for chemical analysis of welding mate- CrNi stainless materials C, Cr, Mo, Ni, Mn, Si, Cb
rial to be used for corrosion resistant overlay cladding
shall require a test weld made in accordance with the
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Figure NF-2433.1-1
Delta Ferrite Content
18 20 22 24 26 28 30
18 18
)
FN
r(
be
4
0
m
nu
8
16 te 16
12
rri
2
Fe
16
6
Nieq Ni 35 C 20 N 0.25 Cu
20
24
10
28
14
35
18
14 22 14
45
26
30 55
40 65
50 75
60
12 85 12
70
80 95
90
100
10 10
18 20 22 24 26 28 30
Creq Cr Mo 0.7 Nb
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) The actual nitrogen content is preferred. If this is not available, the following applicable nitrogen value shall be used:
(1) GMAW welds, 0.08%, except that when selfshielding, fluxcored electrodes are used, 0.12%
(2) Welds made using other processes, 0.06%.
(b) This diagram is identical to the WRC1992 Diagram, except that the solidification mode lines have been removed for ease of use.
(a) Calibration of magnetic instruments shall conform NF-2500 EXAMINATION AND REPAIR OF
to AWS A4.2. MATERIAL
(b) The weld deposit for magnetic delta ferrite determi-
nation shall be made in accordance with NF-2432.1(c).
NF-2510 EXAMINATION AND REPAIR OF
MATERIAL OTHER THAN BOLTING
(c) A minimum of six ferrite readings shall be taken on
the surface of the weld deposit. The readings obtained Material for supports shall be examined in accordance
shall be averaged to a single Ferrite Number (FN). with the material specification. Defects may be repaired
as permitted by the material specification.
NF-2433.2 Acceptance Standards. The minimum ac-
ceptable delta ferrite shall be 5FN. The results of the delta
ferrite determination shall be included in the Certified Ma- NF-2520 REQUIRED EXAMINATION AND
terial Test Report of NF-2130 or NF-4120. ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS FOR CLASS
1 SPRINGS
Spring coils for Class 1 variable, constant, and sway
NF-2440 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF WELDING
brace standard supports shall be examined after coiling
MATERIAL
by either the magnetic particle or liquid penetrant meth-
Suitable storage and handling of electrodes, flux, and od. Linear indications shall be removed by grinding and
other welding materials shall be maintained. Precautions blending. If the depth of the ground area exceeds 3% of
shall be taken to minimize absorption of moisture by the bar diameter or thickness, the spring coil shall be
fluxes and cored, fabricated, and coated electrodes. rejected.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
ARTICLE NF-3000
DESIGN
NF-3100 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS NF-3112.3 Design Stress Intensity and Allowable
Stress Values. When the procedures of design by analysis
NF-3110 LOADING CRITERIA (NF-3220) are employed, the applicable design stress in-
NF-3111 Loading Conditions tensity values S m listed in Tables 2A, 2B, and 4 of Section
II, Part D, Subpart 1 shall be used. When the procedures of
The loadings that shall be taken into account in design-
linear elastic analysis (NF-3320) are employed, the allow-
ing a support include, but are not limited to, those in the
able stress values shall be the applicable yield strength va-
following:
lues S y listed in Table Y1, Section II, Part D, Subpart 1 as
(a) weight of the piping or component and normal con-
modified by the design factors given in NF-3322. The ma-
tents under plant and system operating and test condi-
terial shall not be used at metal and design temperatures
tions, including loads due to static and dynamic head
that exceed the temperature limit in the applicability col-
and fluid flow effects
umn for which stress or stress intensity values are listed.
(b) weight of the support The values in the tables may be interpolated for intermedi-
(c) superimposed static and thermal loads and reac- ate temperatures.
tions induced by the supported system components
(d) dynamic loads, including loads caused by earth- NF-3113 Service Conditions
quake and vibration
Each Service Condition to which the piping or compo-
(e) effects from piping thermal expansion
nent may be subjected shall be categorized in accordance
(f) anchor and support movement effects
with NCA2142.2, and Service Limits [NCA2142.4(b)]
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(g) environmental loads such as wind and snow loads shall be designated in the Design Specification in such de-
(h) expansion or contraction of a component produced tail as will provide a complete basis for design in accor-
by internal or external pressure dance with this Article.
Guidelines for classification of these loadings into pri-
mary, secondary, or peak are listed in NF-3120 and NF-3114 Test Conditions
NF-3220.
The component and piping support loadings resulting
from test conditions shall be identified (NCA2142).
NF-3112 Design Loadings
The Design Loadings shall be established in accordance NF-3120 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
with NCA2142.1 and NF-3112.1 through NF-3112.3. NF-3121 Terms Relating to Design by Analysis
NF-3112.1 Design Temperature. The specified Design NF-3121.1 General Considerations.
Temperature shall be established in accordance with (a) Terms that are common to the design by stress ana-
NCA2142.1(b). The metal temperature shall be deter- lysis of Plate and ShellType, LinearType, and Standard
mined by computation using accepted heat transfer proce- Supports are defined in NF-3121.2 through NF-3121.16.
dures or by measurement from equipment in service (b) Terms unique to the design by stress analysis of
under plant and system equivalent operating conditions. Plate and ShellType Supports are defined in NF-3212.
In lieu of heat transfer analysis or measurements, the com- (c) Terms unique to the design by stress analysis of
ponent or piping Design Temperature may be used. In no LinearType Supports are defined in NF-3313.
case shall the temperature at the surface of the metal ex-
NF-3121.2 Primary Stress. Primary stress is any nor-
ceed the maximum temperature listed in Tables 1A, 1B,
mal stress or shear stress developed by an imposed load-
2A, 2B, 3, 4, and Y1 of Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, or ex-
ing that is necessary to satisfy the laws of equilibrium of
ceed the maximum temperature limitations specified else-
external and internal forces and moments. The basic char-
where in this Subsection.
acteristic of a primary stress is that it is not selflimiting.
NF-3112.2 Design Mechanical Loads. The specified Primary stresses that considerably exceed the yield
Design Mechanical Loads shall be established in accor- strength will result in failure or, at least, in gross distor-
dance with NCA2142.1(c), and shall include all loads from tion. Primary membrane stress is divided into general
the component or piping acting on the support. and local categories. A general primary membrane stress
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
is one that is so distributed in the support that no redistri- NF-3121.9 Total Stress. Total stress is the sum of the
bution of load occurs in the support as a result of yielding. primary and secondary stress contributions. Recognition
Examples of primary stress are of each of the individual contributions is essential to estab-
(a) general membrane stress in a circular cylindrical lishment of appropriate stress limitations.
shell or a spherical shell due to internal pressure or to dis- NF-3121.10 Critical Buckling. Critical buckling oc-
tributed loads curs when a support is loaded to a state at which an infi-
(b) bending stress in a cantilever beam due to a normal nitesimal additional load or disturbance causes the
end load support to change from an equilibrium condition to one
For evaluation purposes, stresses induced in the sup- of instability.
port by restraint of free end displacement [NF-3111(e)] NF-3121.11 Thermal Stress. Thermal stress is a self
and anchor motion [NF-3111(f)] of piping are considered balancing stress produced by a nonuniform distribution
primary stresses. of temperature or by differing thermal coefficients of ex-
pansion. Thermal stress is developed in a solid body
13 NF-3121.3 Secondary Stress. Secondary stress is a whenever a volume of material is prevented from assum-
normal stress or a shear stress developed by the con- ing the size and shape that it normally would under a
straint of adjacent material or by selfconstraint of the change in temperature. Evaluation of thermal stresses in
structure. The basic characteristic of a secondary stress the support is not required by this Subsection.
is that it is selflimiting. Local yielding and minor distor-
tions can satisfy the conditions that cause the stress to oc- NF-3121.12 Free End Displacement. Free end displa-
cur, and failure from one application of the stress is not to cement consists of the relative motions that would occur
be expected. between an attachment and connected structure or equip-
ment if the two members were separated and permitted to
Examples of secondary stress are move.
(a) general thermal stress [NF-3121.11]
NF-3121.13 Anchor Point Motion Stress. Anchor
(b) bending stress at a gross structural discontinuity point motion stresses are those stresses resulting from
the differential motion of support points. An example is
NF-3121.4 Peak Stress. Peak stress is that increment
differential building settlement.
of stress that is additive to the primary plus secondary
stresses by reason of local discontinuities or local thermal NF-3121.14 Gross Structural Discontinuity. Gross
stress (NF-3121.11), including the effects, if any, of stress structural discontinuity is a geometric or material discon-
concentrations. The basic characteristic of a peak stress is tinuity that affects the stress or strain distribution through
that it does not cause any noticeable distortion and is ob- the entire thickness of the member. Gross discontinuity
jectionable only as a possible source of a fatigue crack or a type stresses are those portions of the actual stress distri-
brittle fracture. A stress that is not highly localized falls butions that produce net bending and membrane force re-
into this category if it is of a type that cannot cause notice- sultants when integrated through the thickness. Examples
able distortion. Evaluation of peak stresses in the support of a gross structural discontinuity are headtoshell junc-
is not required by this Subsection. tions, flangetoshell junctions, nozzles, and junctions be-
tween parts of different diameters or thicknesses.
NF-3121.5 Normal Stress. Normal stress is the com-
NF-3121.15 Limit Analysis Collapse Load. The
ponent of stress normal to the plane of reference. This is
methods of limit analysis are used to compute the maxi-
also referred to as direct stress. Usually the distribution
mum load or combination of loads a structure made of ide-
of normal stress is not uniform through the thickness of
ally plastic (nonstrainhardening) material can carry. The
a part, so this stress is considered to have two compo-
deformations of an ideally plastic structure increase with-
nents, one uniformly distributed and equal to the average
out bound at this load, which is termed the collapse load.
stress across the thickness under consideration, and the
other varying from this average value across the thickness. NF-3121.16 Collapse Load Lower Bound. If, for a
given load, any system of stresses can be found which
NF-3121.6 Shear Stress. Shear stress is the compo- everywhere satisfies equilibrium and nowhere exceeds
nent of stress tangent to the plane of reference. the material yield strength, using shape factors associated
with the cross section under consideration, the load is at
NF-3121.7 Membrane Stress. Membrane stress is the or below the collapse load. This is the lower bound theo-
component of normal stress that is uniformly distributed rem of limit analysis which permits calculations of a lower
and equal to the average stress across the thickness of bound to the collapse load.
the section under consideration.
NF-3121.17 Local Structural Discontinuity. Local
NF-3121.8 Bending Stress. Bending stress is the com- structural discontinuity is a geometric or material discon-
ponent of normal stress that varies across the thickness. tinuity that affects the stress or strain distribution through
The variation may or may not be linear. a fractional part of the thickness. The stress distribution
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
associated with a local discontinuity causes only very loca- be disengaged by movement of the supported piping or
lized deformation or strain and has no significant effect on component. Supports needed only to provide stability dur-
the shelltype discontinuity deformations. Examples are ing Level C or Level D Service Conditions shall be designed
small fillet radii, small attachments, and partial penetra- and installed so as not to overstress the piping or compo-
tion welds. nent during Level A or Level B Service Conditions.
NF-3124 Rolling and Sliding Supports The requirements for acceptability of support design
are given in (a) through (e).
(a) Rolling and sliding supports shall permit free move-
ment of the piping or component, or the piping or compo- (a) The design shall be such that the stress intensity va-
nent shall be designed to include the imposed load and lues or the stress values (whichever are applicable) will
frictional resistance of these types of supports; their di- not exceed the limits given in this Subarticle.
mensions shall provide for the designed movement of Table NF-3131(a)-1 indicates the rules and limits to be
the supported piping or component. used for the various classes and types of design proce-
(b) Sliding supports (or shoes) and brackets shall be de- dures. The applicable tables of allowable stress values
signed to accommodate the forces caused by friction in ad- for materials to be used with a specific design procedure
dition to the loads imposed by bearing. The dimensions of are referenced in Table NF-2121(a)-1.
the support shall provide for the design movement of the (b) The design procedure shall be one of those given in
supported piping or component. Material and lubricants Table NF-3131(a)-1 as being applicable to supports.
used in sliding supports shall be suitable for the environ- (c) The design details shall conform to the rules of this
ment of the metal at the point of sliding contact and shall Subarticle or to those referenced herein.
be specified in the Design Documents. (d) For configurations where compressive stresses oc-
cur, the critical buckling stress shall be taken into account
NF-3125 Sway Braces and Vibration Dampeners in addition to the requirements of (a), (b), and (c).
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Sway braces and vibration dampeners may be used to (e) For Class 1 supports, protection against nonductile
limit the effects of vibration and may be of the rigid strut fracture shall be provided. An acceptable procedure for
(linear type) tensioncompression type. If employed in the nonductile failure prevention is given in Appendix G of
design or added as a result of observation under startup or Section III Appendices.
initial operating conditions, the effect of sway braces shall
be included in the stress analysis of the piping or compo-
nent for all of the specified conditions. NF-3132 Dimensional Standards
NF-3127 Provisions for Movement of Supported Dimensions of supports may comply with the standards
Piping or Component and specifications listed in Table NCA71001 but are not
mandatory. Compliance with these standards does not re-
Consideration shall be given to the relative motion of
place or eliminate the requirements for stress analysis or
the supported piping or component and the support.
load rating.
When clearances or travel ranges or both are required
to accommodate piping or component movements, suffi-
cient design margins shall be introduced to allow for var-
NF-3133 Stress Analysis
iations due to fabrication and installation. Care shall be
taken to ensure that design clearances and travel ranges A detailed stress analysis or Design Report, as required
are based on the maximum range that might occur be- by NCA3550 for all supports, shall be prepared in suffi-
tween two operating conditions and not necessarily on cient detail to show that each of the stress limits of
the maximum cold to hot range. All parts of the support NF-3200 or NF-3300 is satisfied when the support is sub-
shall be fabricated and assembled so that they will not jected to the loadings of NF-3110.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Table NF-3131(a)-1
Reference Paragraphs for Procedures for Design of Component Supports, Piping Supports, and
Standard Supports
Plate and Shell Linear
Type and Class Design by Experimen- Load Design by Weld Experimen- Load
of Support Analysis Bolting Weld Joint tal Analysis Rating Analysis Bolting Joints tal Analysis Rating
Component
Class 1 NF-3220, NF-3225, NF-3226, NF-3270 NF-3280 NF-3320, NF-3324, NF-3324, NF-3370 NF-3380
NF-3522 NF-3525 NF-3526 NF-3523 NF-3525 NF-3526
Class 2 and MC NF-3250, NF-3255, NF-3256, NF-3270 NF-3280 NF-3350, NF-3324, NF-3324, NF-3370 NF-3380
[Note (1)] NF-3552 NF-3555 NF-3556 NF-3553 NF-3555 NF-3556
Class 3 NF-3260, NF-3265, NF-3266, NF-3270 NF-3280 NF-3360, NF-3324, NF-3324, NF-3370 NF-3380
NF-3552 NF-3555 NF-3556 NF-3553 NF-3555 NF-3556
Piping
Class 1 NF-3220, NF-3225, NF-3226, NF-3270 NF-3280 NF-3320, NF-3324, NF-3324, NF-3370 NF-3380
NF-3622 NF-3625 NF-3626 NF-3623 NF-3625 NF-3626
Class 2 NF-3250, NF-3255, NF-3256, NF-3270 NF-3280 NF-3350, NF-3324, NF-3324, NF-3370 NF-3380
NF-3652 NF-3655 NF-3656 NF-3653 NF-3655 NF-3656
Class 3 NF-3260, NF-3265, NF-3266, NF-3270 NF-3280 NF-3360, NF-3324, NF-3324, NF-3370 NF-3380
NF-3652 NF-3655 NF-3656 NF-3653 NF-3655 NF-3656
Standard
Class 1 NF-3220, NF-3225, NF-3226, NF-3270 NF-3280 NF-3320, NF-3324, NF-3324, NF-3370 NF-3380
[Note (1)] NF-3422 NF-3425 NF-3426 NF-3423 NF-3425 NF-3426
Class 2 NF-3250, NF-3255, NF-3256, NF-3270 NF-3280 NF-3350 NF-3453 NF-3324, NF-3324, NF-3370,
[Note (1)] NF-3452 NF-3455 NF-3456 NF-3455 NF-3456 NF-3380
Class 3 NF-3260, NF-3265, NF-3266, NF-3270 NF-3280 NF-3360, NF-3324, NF-3324, NF-3370 NF-3380
NF-3452 NF-3455 NF-3456 NF-3453 NF-3455 NF-3456
NOTE:
(1) Supports for Class 2 vessels designed to NC3200 shall be designed in accordance with Class 1 requirements.
NF-3134 Support Tolerances (b) Unless either the experimental stress analysis proce-
dure or the load rating procedure is used, the require-
(a) Tolerances shall be specified by the designer in
ments of the following paragraphs apply.
the design output documents. Fabrication tolerances
and local installation tolerances as contained in
Nonmandatory Appendix NF-D are only mandatory when NF-3142 Plate and ShellType Supports
invoked by the designer. Analysis Procedure
(b) When specifying the support tolerances, the support (a) Elastic analysis based on maximum shear stress the-
designer shall consider the piping support location/orien- ory in accordance with the rules of NF-3200 shall be used
tation tolerances specified by the piping designer (Appen- in the design of Plate and ShellType Supports of Class 1
dix T1230). construction.
(b) Elastic analysis based on maximum stress theory
NF-3140 GENERAL DESIGN PROCEDURES shall be used in the design of Plate and ShellType Sup-
NF-3141 Types of Procedures ports of Class 2, 3, and MC construction. Supports for Class
2 vessels designed to NC3200 shall be designed in accor-
(a) The design procedure which may be used is depen-
dance with Class 1 requirements.
dent on the type of support being designed and the Class
of construction involved. Three design procedures are re-
cognized, namely NF-3143 LinearType Supports Analysis
(1) design by analysis Procedure
(-a) maximum shear stress theory (a) The analysis procedure shall comply with (1) or (2).
(-b) maximum stress theory (1) Elastic analysis based on maximum stress theory
(2) experimental stress analysis (Section III Appen- in accordance with the rules of NF-3300 shall be used
dices, Appendix II) for the design of LinearType Supports for Class 1, 2,
(3) load rating and 3 and MC construction.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
(2) Limit analysis in accordance with the procedures NF-3221.1 Design Limits. The stress intensity limits
of NF-3340 shall be used in the design of LinearType Sup- which must be satisfied for the Design Loadings stated
ports for Class 1, 2, and 3 and MC construction when mem- in the Design Specification are the two limits of this para-
bers and their connections are subject to high cycle fatigue graph and the Special Stress Limits of NF-3223. The design
as defined in NF-3331. stress intensity values S m are given in NF-3224.
(b) High cycle fatigue analysis in accordance with proce- (a) General primary membrane stress intensity P m is
dures of NF-3330 shall be used in the design of Linear derived from the average value across the thickness of a
Type Supports for Class 1 construction. section of the general primary stresses produced by speci-
fied Design Mechanical Loads, but excluding all secondary
stresses. Averaging is to be applied to the stress compo-
NF-3144 Standard Supports Analysis nents prior to determination of the stress intensity values.
Procedure The allowable value of this stress intensity is S m at the De-
sign Temperature.
Standard Supports designed by analysis shall be de-
(b) Primary membrane plus primary bending stress in-
signed to either the requirements of NF-3142 or
tensity P m + P b is derived from the highest value across
NF-3143, according to whether they are Plate and Shell
the thickness of a section of the general membrane stres-
Type or LinearType Standard Supports.
ses plus primary bending stresses produced by the speci-
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Table NF-3221.2-1
Elastic Analysis Stress Categories and Stress Limit Factors for Class 1 Plate And ShellType Supports
Designed by Analysis
Stress Limit Factors for Loading Categories [Note (1)]
Service Level B Service Level C
Stress Category Design Service Level A [Note (2)] [Note (3)] Service Level D Test Loadings
Primary stresses K m = 1.0 K m = 1.0 K m = 1.33 K m = 1.5 K m = 1.33
[Note (4)],
[Note (5)] K v = 1.0 K v = 1.0 K v = 1.33 K v = 1.5 K v = 1.33
but stress 1/2 of but stress 1/2 of but stress 1/2 of but stress 1/2 of but stress 1/2 of
critical buckling critical buckling critical buckling critical buckling critical buckling
stress stress stress stress stress
Primary plus Evaluation is required for critical buckling for all loading categories. The requirements of this Subarticle shall be met for
secondary this evaluation.
stresses [Note
(5)], [Note (6)]
Peak stresses Evaluation not required.
GENERAL NOTE:
K b k = stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable membrane stress intensity or membrane plus bending stress intensity
(compression only)
K m = stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable membrane stress intensity or membrane plus bending stress intensity
(see NF-3221.1 and NF-3221.2)
K v = stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable shear stress (see NF-3223.2)
NOTES:
(1) Control of deformation is not assured by these stress limit factors. When required by Design Specification, deformation control
must be considered separately.
(2) K m , K v , and K b k = 1.0 for design of snubbers and dampers.
(3) Stress shall not exceed 0.7 Su .
(4) For Service Levels A, B, C, and D, stresses induced on the supports by restraint of freeend displacement and anchor motions of
piping shall be considered as primary stresses.
(5) Thermal stresses within the support as defined by NF-3121.11 need not be evaluated.
(6) Service Levels A and B, primary plus secondary stresses shall be limited to a range of 2S y or S u at temperature, whichever is less
for component supports only.
paragraph describes the procedure for the calculation of (c) For each category, calculate the algebraic sum of the
the stress intensities which are subject to the specified values of t that result from the different types of load-
limits. The steps in the procedure are stipulated in (a) ings, and similarly for the other five stress components.
through (e). Certain combinations of the categories must also be
(a) At the point on the support which is being investi- considered.
gated, choose an orthogonal set of coordinates, such as (d) Translate the stress components for the t, l, and r di-
tangential, longitudinal, and radial, and designate them rections into principal stresses 1 , 2 , and 3 .
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
by the subscripts t, l, and r . The stress components in (e) Calculate the stress differences S 1 2 , S 2 3 , and S 3 1
these directions are then designated t , l , and r for di- from the following equations:
rect stresses and T l t , T l r , and T r t for shear stresses.
(b) Calculate the stress components for each type of
loading to which the item will be subjected and assign
each set of stress values to one or a group of the following
categories:
(1) g e n e r a l p r i m a r y m e m b r a n e s t r e s s P m
(NF-3121.7)
(2) primary bending stress P b (NF-3121.8)
(3) secondary stress Q (NF-3121.3)
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
The stress intensity S is the largest absolute value of NF-3223.4 Applications of Elastic Analysis for
S 1 2 , S 2 3 , and S 3 1 . Stresses Beyond the Yield Strength. Certain of the allow-
NOTE: Membrane stress intensity is derived from the stress compo- able stresses permitted in the design criteria are such that
nents averaged across the thickness of the section. The averaging the maximum stress calculated on an elastic basis may ex-
shall be performed at the component stress level in (b) or (c). ceed the yield strength of the material.
Table NF-3225.2-1
Stress Limit Factors for Class 1, 2, 3, and MC Bolt Design by Analysis
Stress Limit Factors for Loading Levels Stated in Design Specification [Note (1)]
Stress Service Service Service Service Test
Category Design Level A Level B Level C Level D Loading
Tension and K b o = 1.0 K b o = 1.0 K b o = 1.15 K b o = 1.25 [Note K b o = 1.25
shear (2)]
GENERAL NOTE:
K b o = stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable tensile and shear stresses
NOTES:
(1) Not to be used for friction type connections.
(2) Use Appendix F.
(3) the applicable welds may be either square groove, NF-3226.2 Stress Intensities and Stress Limits for
V groove, bevel groove, J groove, U groove, flare V groove, Welded Joints in Plate and ShellType Supports.
or flare bevel groove [see Figure NF-3226.1(a)-1]. (a) Design Limits. The stress intensity and allowable
(4) when angle joints are used for connecting a tran- stress limits which must be satisfied for welds for the De-
sition in diameter to a cylinder, the angle of sign Loadings stated in the Design Specification shall be
Figure NF-3226.1-1, sketch (f) shall not exceed 30 deg. the following:
(5) A tapered transition having a length not less than (1) Full Penetration Groove Welds. The stress intensity
three times the offset between the adjacent surfaces of limits for full penetration groove welds shall not exceed
abutting sections, as shown in Figure NF-3226.1(a)-2, the applicable stress intensity value for the base metal
shall be provided at joints between sections that differ being joined, as specified in NF-3221.1 and
in thickness by more than onefourth of the thickness of Table NF-3324.5(a)-1. See NF-3111.
the thinner section or by more than 1/8 in. (3 mm), which- (2) Partial Penetration Groove Welds
ever is less. The transition may be formed by any process (-a) Compression Normal to Effective Throat or
that will provide a uniform taper. The weld may be partly Shear on Effective Throat. The stress intensity and stress
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
or entirely in the tapered section, or adjacent to it. This limits shall be the same as those for the base metal as re-
paragraph also applies when there is a reduction in thick- quired in NF-3221.1.
ness within a spherical shell, or cylindrical course or plate. (-b) Tension Normal to the Axis on the Effective
(6) When the use of backing rings will result in unde- Throat. The stress limits shall be as specified in
sirable conditions such as severe stress or corrosion, the Table NF-3324.5(a)-1.
requirements of NF-4240 shall be met. (3) Fillet Welds. The allowable stress limits for fillet
(b) Corner Joints. Corner joints shall be one of the welds shall be as specified in Table NF-3324.5(a)-1.
following: (b) Service Limits, Levels A, B, C, and D, and Test. The
(1) full penetration, as shown in Figure NF-3226.1-1, rules and stress limits that must be satisfied for welds
sketch (d1) for any Level A, B, C, and D Service and Test Loadings sta-
ted in the Design Specification are those given in (a) multi-
(2) partial penetration with a fillet weld as shown in
plied by the appropriate base material stress limit factor
Figure NF-3226.1-1, sketches (d2) and (d3)
given in Table NF-3251.2-1.
(3) the applicable welds are fillet, square groove, V (c) The effective sizes of welds shall be as given in
groove, bevel groove, U groove, J groove, flare V groove NF-3324.5(d) and NF-3324.5(f).
and flare bevel groove
(c) Tee Joints. Tee joints shall be one of the following: NF-3226.3 Consideration of Lamellar Tearing.
Weld ed joint c onfigurations c ausing significant
(1) full penetration, Figure NF-3226.1-1, sketches (c)
throughthickness tensile stress [as defined in
and (g)
NF-1215(b)] during fabrication and/or service on rolled
(2) partial penetration, double welded with or with- product forms should be avoided. However, if this type
out additional fillet welds, Figure NF-3226.1-1, sketch (e) of construction is used, the designer should consider one
(3) partial penetration, single welded between the or several of the following factors that may reduce the sus-
end surface of a closed tubular section or a closed formed ceptibility of the joint to experience lamellar tearing and
section, Figure NF-3226.1-1, sketch (h) provide documentation, including fabrication require-
(4) the applicable welds may be square groove, bevel ments, in the Design Output Documents:
groove, J groove, flare V groove or flare bevel groove (a) Reduce volume of weld metal to the extent practical.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Figure NF-3226.1-1
Permissible Welded Joints for Class 1 Plate and ShellType Supports
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Figure NF-3226.1(a)-1
Typical Weld Details Referenced
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Figure NF-3226.1(a)-2
Butt Welding of Plates of Unequal Thickness
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) 3y , where is required length of taper and y is the offset between the adjacent surfaces of abutting sections.
(b) Length of required taper may include the width of the weld.
(c) In all cases shall not be less than 3y.
(b) Select materials that are resistant to lamellar NF-3251.2 Service Loadings Service Level A
tearing. Through D. The rules and stress limits that must be satis-
(c) Invoke any of the special fabrication requirements of fied in an elastic analysis for any Level A through D Service
NF-4441. Loading stated in the Design Specification are those given
for Design Loadings in NF-3251.1 multiplied by the appro-
NF-3250 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 2 AND priate stress limit factor specified in Table NF-3251.2-1.
MC
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-3251.3 Test Loadings. The rules and stress limits
Plate and ShellType Supports may be designed by that must be satisfied for any Test Loadings stated in the
either elastic or limit analysis, limits for which are given Design Specification are those given for Design Loadings
in the following subparagraphs. Limits for bolts and welds in NF-3251.1 multiplied by the appropriate stress limit
are given in NF-3255 and NF-3256. For general require- factor specified in Table NF-3251.2-1.
ments and definitions, see NF-3100 and NF-3210.
NF-3251.4 Limit Analysis. The limits for Class 1
NF-3251 Stress Limits Plate and ShellType Supports designed by limit analysis
apply.
NF-3251.1 Design Loadings. The stress10 limits are
satisfied for the Design Loadings (NCA2142.1) stated in
the Design Specifications if the requirements of eqs. (1) NF-3252 Special Stress Limits
and (2) are met. The following deviations from the basic stress limits are
provided to cover special Service Loadings or configura-
1
tions. Some of these deviations are more restrictive and
some are less restrictive than the basic stress limits. In
2 cases of conflict between these requirements and the basic
stress limits, the rules of this paragraph take precedence
where for the particular situations to which they apply.
S = allowable stress value, ksi (MPa), from the applic- NF-3252.1 Bearing Loads.
able table of Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, as refer- (a) The average bearing stress for resistance to crushing
enced in Table NF-2121(a)-1 under the maximum load, experienced as a result of De-
b = bending stress, ksi (MPa) (NF-3121.8) sign Loadings, Test Loadings, or any Service Loadings,
m = membrane stress, ksi (MPa) (NF-3121.7) shall be limited to S y at temperature, except that when
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Table NF-3251.2-1
Elastic Analysis Stress Categories and Stress Limit Factors for Class 2, 3, and MC Plate And
ShellType Supports Designed by Analysis
Stress Limit Factors for Loading Categories [Note (1)]
Service Level B Service Level C
Stress Category Design Service Level A [Note (2)] [Note (3)] Service Level D Test Loadings
Primary stresses K m = 1.0 K m = 1.0 K m = 1.33 K m = 1.5 K m = 1.33
[Note (4)], K v = 1.0 K v = 1.0 K v = 1.33 [Note (6)] K v = 1.5 [Note (6)] K v = 1.33 [Note
[Note (5)] (6)]
K b k = 1.0 K b k = 1.0 K b k = 1.33 K b k = 1.5 Use Appendix F K b k = 1.33
but stress 1/2 of but stress 1/2 of but stress 1/2 of but stress 1/2 of but stress 1/2 of
critical buckling critical buckling critical buckling critical buckling critical buckling
stress stress stress stress stress
GENERAL NOTE:
K b k = stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable membrane stress or membrane plus bending stress (compression only)
K m = stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable membrane stress or membrane plus bending stress (see NF-3251.1 and
NF-3261)
K v = stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable shear stress (see NF-3252.2 and NF-3261)
NOTES:
(1) Control of deformation is not assured by these stress limit factors. When required by Design Specification, deformation control must
be considered separately.
(2) K m and K b k = 1.0 for design of snubbers and dampers.
(3) Stress shall not exceed 0.7 Su .
(4) For Service Levels A, B, C, and D, stresses induced on the supports by restraint of freeend displacement and anchor motions of pip-
ing shall be considered as primary stresses.
(5) Thermal stresses within the support as defined by NF-3121.11 need not be evaluated.
(6) Shear stress shall not exceed 0.42Su .
the distance to a free edge is larger than the distance over NF-3256 Design of Welded Joints
which the bearing load is applied, a stress of 1.5S y at tem- NF-3256.1 Permissible Types of Welded Joints in
perature is permitted. Plate and ShellType Supports. All welded joints in
(b) When bearing loads are applied near free edges, Plate and ShellType Supports shall be continuous and
such as at a protruding ledge, the possibility of a shear fail- shall be of one of the types listed in (a) through (d). Typi-
ure shall be considered. In the case of load controlled cal examples of those permitted types are shown in
stress only, the average shear stress shall be limited to Figure NF-3256.1-1. Fillet and partial penetration welds
0.6S in the case of primary stress (NF-3121.2). shall meet the requirements of NF-3324.5(d), except that
(c) When considering bearing stresses in pins and simi- NF-3324.5(d)(7) does not apply. Plug and slot welds shall
lar members, the S y at temperature value is applicable, ex- meet the requirements of NF-3324.5(e). Lap joints shall
cept that a value of 1.5S y may be used if no credit is given meet the requirements of NF-3324.3.
to the bearing area within one pin diameter from a plate
edge. (a) Butt Joints. Butt joints shall be one of the following:
NF-3252.2 Pure Shear. (1) full penetration, single and double welded,
(a) The average primary shear stress across a section Figure NF-3256.1-1, sketches (a1) and (a2).
loaded in pure shear, experienced as a result of Design
(2) p a r t i a l p e n e t r a t i o n , d o u b l e w e l d e d ,
Loadings, Test Loadings, or any Service Loadings, shall
Figure NF-3256.1-1, sketch (b).
be limited to 0.6S .
(b) The maximum primary shear, experienced as a re- (3) when angle joints are used for connecting a tran-
sult of Design Loadings, Test Loadings, or any Service sition in diameter to a cylinder, the angle of
Loadings exclusive of stress concentration at the periph- Figure NF-3256.1-1, sketch (n) shall not exceed 30 deg.
ery of a solid circular section in torsion, shall be limited (4) A tapered transition having a length not less than
to 0.8S. three times the offset between the adjacent surfaces of
abutting sections, as shown in Figure NF-3226.1(a)-2,
shall be provided at joints between sections that differ
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure NF-3256.1-1
Permissible Welded Joints for Class 2, 3, and MC Plate and ShellType Supports
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
whichever is less. The transition may be formed by any (b) Service Limits. Level A Through D, and Test. The rules
process that will provide a uniform taper. The weld may and stress limits which must be satisfied for welds for any
be partly or entirely in the tapered section or adjacent Level A through D Service and Test Loading stated in the
to it. Design Specification are those given in (a) multiplied by
(5) When the use of backing rings will result in unde- the appropriate base material stress limit factor given in
sirable conditions such as severe stress or corrosion, the Table NF-3251.2-1.
requirements of NF-4240 shall be met. NF-3256.3 Effective Size. The effective sizes of welds
(b) Corner Joints. Corner joints shall be one of the shall be as given in NF-3324.5(d) through NF-3324.5(f).
following:
NF-3256.4 Consideration of Lamellar Tearing.
(1) full penetration, as shown in Figure NF-3256.1-1,
Weld ed joint c onfigurations c ausing significant
sketch (c)
throughthickness tensile stress [as defined in
(2) partial penetration with a fillet weld as shown in NF-1215(b)] during fabrication and/or service on rolled
Figure NF-3256.1-1, sketches (d) and (e) product forms should be avoided. However, if this type
(c) Tee Joints. Tee joints shall be one of the following: of construction is used, the designer should consider one
(1) full penetration, single or double welded, or several of the following factors that may reduce the sus-
Figure NF-3256.1-1, sketches (f1), (f2), and (h) ceptibility of the joint to experience lamellar tearing and
(2) partial penetration, with or without additional fil- provide documentation, including fabrication require-
let welds, Figure NF-3256.1-1, sketch (g) ments, in the Design Output Documents:
(3) partial penetration, single welded between a plate (a) Reduce volume of weld metal to the extent practical.
and the end surface of a closed tubular section or a closed (b) Select materials that are resistant to lamellar
formed section, Figure NF-3256.1-1, sketch (j) tearing.
(4) fillet, double welded, Figure NF-3256.1-1, sketch (c) Invoke any of the special fabrication requirements of
(k1); single welded when double members are used, NF-4441.
Figure NF-3256.1-1, sketch (k2)
(5) fillet, single welded between a flat surface and the NF-3260 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 3
end surface of a closed tubular section or a closed formed NF-3261 Stress Limits
section, Figure NF-3256.1-1, sketch (l) The design of Class 3 supports shall be in accordance
(d) Lap Joints. Lap joints shall be fillet, double welded, with the requirements of NF-3250 using one of the design
Figure NF-3256.1-1, sketch (m). procedures indicated in Table NF-3131(a)-1 for Class 3
(e) The applicable welds for the joints permitted in (a) construction.
through (d) are
(1) square groove, bevel groove, J groove, flare bevel NF-3265 Design of Bolting
groove, U groove and V groove The provisions of NF-3225 apply.
(2) plug and slot welds are permitted in (c) and (d)
only NF-3266 Design of Welded Joints
(3) fillet welds are permitted in (c)(4), (c)(5), and (d) The types of welded joints shall be as stipulated in
only NF-3256 for Class 2 and MC supports, except that for
13 NF-3256.2 Allowable Stress Limits. groove welded Tjoints, groove welded corner joints, and
(a) Design Limits. The allowable stress limits which fillet welded Tjoints, as listed in NF-3256.1(a)(2) and
must be satisfied for the Design Loadings stated in the De- NF-3256.1(a)(3), the welds may be intermittent instead
sign Specification shall be the following: of continuous. Intermittent fillet welds shall meet the re-
(1) Full Penetration Groove Welds. The allowable quirements of NF-3324.5(d)(7). The allowable stress lim-
stress limits for full penetration groove welds shall not ex- its shall be as stipulated in NF-3256.2.
ceed the applicable allowable stress value for the base me-
NF-3270 EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS
tal being jointed, as specified in NF-3251.1 and
Table NF-3324.5(a)-1. Supports may be designed by experimental stress ana-
(2) Partial Penetration Groove Welds lysis in accordance with Appendix II (Section III
(-a) Compression Normal to Effective Throat or Appendices).
Shear on Effective Throat. The allowable stress limits shall
NF-3280 DESIGN BY LOAD RATING
be as specified in Table NF-3324.5(a)-1.
(-b) Tension Normal to the Axis on the Effective NF-3281 Procedure for Load Rating
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Throat. The stress limits shall be as specified in The procedure for load rating shall consist of imposing a
Table NF-3324.5(a)-1. total load on one or more duplicate fullsize samples of a
(3) Fillet Welds. The allowable stress limit for fillet support equal to or less than the load under which the
welds shall be as specified in Table NF-3324.5(a)-1. support fails to perform its required function. Fullsize
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
samples composed of various parts may have each part or NF-3282.2 Plate and ShellType Supports. The load 13
a number of parts load rated, provided that all parts in the ratings for Plate and ShellType Supports for the Service
load path are either load rated or otherwise qualified per Loadings shall be determined by the following equations:
NF-3200, or by experimental stress analysis. When parts Design and Level A Limits (lower of the two values)
are connected by bolting or welding, the connection shall
be either load rated or qualified per NF-3225 or NF-3226.
Should more than one part be load rated in a single load 1
test, then the load rating equations of NF-3280 shall be
evaluated for each part using the parts Sy(act) and Su(act)
values. The part having the lowest load rating shall estab-
lish the load rating for the combination of parts. A single 2
test sample is permitted but, in that case, the load ratings
shall be reduced by 10%. Otherwise, tests shall be run on a
statistically significant number of samples. The permissi- Test and Level B Limits (lower of the two values)
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ble types of welded joints shall be as permitted for the spe-
cific class of construction in NF-3226.1, NF-3256.1, and
3
NF-3266. The fullsize sample shall be fabricated for test-
ing using welds not exceeding weld sizes stipulated in the
Design Drawings. Bolted joints in the test sample shall be
made up using the lowest strength bolt material and mini-
4
mum edge distance allowed by the specification.
NF-3282.4 Alternative Load Rating Method Using Multiply S by 1.5 to arrive at S y values for the material
TL y or T L u Test Results Only. Either T L y or TL u test re- [round up to the next higher 0.5 ksi (3.5 MPa)] if an S y va-
sults may be used to establish a support load rating, pro- lue for the material is needed.
vided the load rating as determined by the method of
NF-3282.2 or NF-3282.3 is modified as follows: NF-3311.2 High Cycle Fatigue Analysis. The rules for
(a) For load rating based on T L y test results only designing LinearType Supports given in NF-3330 are es-
(1) for supports constructed of materials having defi- sentially the same as those given in NF-3320 for linear
nitely determinable yield points and specified minimum elastic analysis, except that the maximum range of stress,
Sy/Su ratios not greater than 0.625, the load rating shall namely, the difference between the minimum and maxi-
be multiplied by 0.83. If Sy(act) of the material is not known, mum value of the stress throughout each cycle and the fre-
150% of the material specified minimum yield strength quency with which the support will be subjected to this
shall be assumed as the S y /Sy(act) in place of multiplier range of stress, shall be taken into consideration when
0.83 so stipulated by the Design Specification (NCA3250).
(2) for supports constructed of carbon steel with spe-
NF-3311.3 Limit Analysis. The rules for limit (plastic)
cified minimum tensile strengths of not over 70,000 psi
analysis given in NF-3340 may be used as an alternative to
(485 MPa), S y ( a c t ) shall be increased by 5,000 psi
the linear elastic analysis method. These rules permit pro-
(34 MPa) prior to determining the load rating
portioning LinearType Supports on the basis of limit de-
(3) for all other materials the determined load rating
sign by determining their lower bound collapse loads.
shall be multiplied by 0.67
The requirements set forth in NF-3320 governing allow-
For supports loaded in compression, a T L u test shall be
able stresses to be used in designing LinearType Supports
performed with the compressive load rating determined
are waived when the limit design procedure is employed,
in accordance with NF-3282.3.
but all other pertinent provisions of NF-3320 shall apply.
(b) For load rating based on T L u test results, the deter-
mined load rating shall be multiplied by 0.50. NF-3311.4 Basis for Determining Stress in Design by
Analysis. The theory of failure used in the rules for the de-
sign of LinearType Supports is the maximum stress theo-
NF-3300 DESIGN RULES FOR LINEARTYPE ry. In the maximum stress theory, the controlling stress is
SUPPORTS the maximum principal stress.
NF-3310 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS NF-3311.5 Terms Relating to Design by Analysis.
This Subarticle provides rules for the design of Linear Terms used in the design of LinearType Supports by
Type Supports by either linear elastic analysis stress analysis are defined in NF-3313.
(NF-3320) or plastic (limit) analysis (NF-3340). Linear
e l a s t i c a n a l yt i c al p r o c e d u r e s ar e a l s o p r o v i d e d
(NF-3330) for the design of members and connections NF-3312 Analysis Methods
which will be subjected to high cycle fatigue conditions
in service. LinearType Supports may be designed by either elastic
or limit analysis, limits for which are given in NF-3312.1.
NF-3311 Design Considerations
NF-3312.1 Elastic Analysis. In elastic analysis it is as-
13 NF-3311.1 Linear Elastic Analysis. The rules for lin- sumed that all component and support stiffnesses remain
ear elastic analysis are based on the yield strength values constant.
at temperature of the materials used in constructing (a) Design Limits. The rules and stress limits that must
lineartype supports that are set forth in Tables 3, 4, and
be satisfied in an elastic analysis for any Design Loading
Y1 of Section II, Part D, Subpart 1. The allowable stresses
shall be stated in the Design Specification.
are determined in NF-3320 by applying factors of safety
dependent on the structural member involved to these (b) Service Limits, Level A Through D. The rules and
specified yield strength values. stress limits which must be satisfied in an elastic analysis
S m values for bolting materials listed in Table 4, Section for any Level A through D Service Loading stated in the De-
II, Part D, Subpart 1 are based on one-third of the calcu- sign Specification are those given in NF-3321 multiplied
lated yield strength at temperature and other factors. Mul- by the appropriate stress limit factor from
tiply S m by 3 to arrive at S y values for the material [round Table NF-3312.1(b)-1.
up to next higher 0.5 ksi (3.5 MPa)] if an S y value for the (c) Test Limits. The rules and stress limits that must be
material is needed. satisfied for any Test Loadings stated in the Design Speci-
S values for bolting materials listed in Table 3, Section fication are those given in NF-3321 multiplied by the ap-
II, Part D, Subpart 1 are based on two-thirds of the calcu- propriate stress limit factor in Table NF-3312.1(b)-1
lated yield strength at temperature and other factors. under Test Loadings.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Table NF-3312.1(b)-1
Elastic Analysis Stress Categories and Stress Limit Factors for Class 1, 2, 3, and MC Linear-Type
Supports Designed by Analysis
Stress Limit Factors for Loading Categories [Note (1)]
Service Level B Service Level C
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Stress Category Design Service Level A [Note (2)] [Note (3)] Service Level D Test Loadings
Primary stresses [Note K s = 1.0 K s = 1.0 K s = 1.33 K s = 1.5 K s = 1.33
(4)], [Note (5)]
K v = 1.0 K v = 1.0 K v = 1.33 [Note K v = 1.5 [Note (6)] K v = 1.33 [Note
(6)] (6)]
GENERAL NOTE:
K b k = stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable compressive axial and bending stresses to determine buckling limit
K s = stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable tensile and bending stresses (see NF-3321.1, NF-3322.1, NF-3350,
and NF-3360)
K v = stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable shear stresses (see NF-3321.1, NF-3322.1, NF-3350, and NF-3360)
NOTES:
(1) Control of deformation is not assured by these stress limit factors. When required by Design Specification, deformation control
must be considered separately.
(2) K s , K v , and K b k = 1.0 for design of snubbers and dampers.
(3) Stress shall not exceed 0.7 S u .
(4) For Service Levels A, B, C, and D, stresses induced on the supports by restraint of freeend displacement and anchor motions of
piping shall be considered as primary stresses.
(5) Thermal stresses within the support as defined by NF-3121.11 need not be evaluated.
(6) Shear stress shall not exceed 0.42 S u .
(7) Service Levels A and B, primary plus secondary stresses, shall be limited to a range of 2 S y or S u at temperature, whichever is
less for component supports only.
C 1 = increment used in computing minimum spacing of P c r = maximum strength of axially loaded compression
oversized and slotted holes member or beam, kips (N)
C 2 = increment used in computing minimum edge dis- P e = Euler buckling load, kips (N)
tance for oversized and slotted holes P s = maximum slip resistance of the joint, lb (N)
D = factor dependent upon type of transverse P y = axial plastic load, equal to member area times spe-
stiffeners cified minimum yield stress, kips (N)
= outside diameter of tubular members, in. (mm) Q a = ratio of effective area of an axially loaded member
E = modulus of elasticity of steel, ksi (MPa) to its total area
F a = axial compressive stress permitted in the absence Q s = axial stress reduction factor
of bending moment, ksi (MPa) R = reaction or concentrated transverse load applied
F a s = axial compressive stress permitted in the absence to beam or girder, kips (N); radius, in. (mm)
of bending moment, for bracing and other second- S u = tabulated values of ultimate tensile strength of ma-
ary members, ksi (MPa) terial at temperature (Table U, Section II, Part D,
F b = bending stress permitted in the absence of axial Subpart 1), ksi (MPa)
force, ksi (MPa) S y = yield strength at temperature (Table Y1, Section
F b = allowable bending stress in compression flange of II, Part D, Subpart 1), ksi (MPa)
plate girders as reduced for hybrid girders or be- T b = specific pretension of a high strength bolt, kips (N)
cause of large web depththickness ratio, ksi T i = initial clamping force per bolt, lb (N)
(MPa) V u = shear produced by required factored loading, ulti-
F e = Euler stress divided by factor of safety, ksi (MPa) mate load, kips (N)
F p = allowable bearing stress on the projected area of Y = ratio of yield stress of web steel to yield stress of
bolts or pins, or on contact area of milled surfaces stiffener steel
and ends of rollers, rockers, or fitted bearing stif- Z x = plastic section modulus for axis of bending, in.3
feners at temperature, ksi (MPa) (mm3)
F s r = stress range, ksi (MPa) a = clear distance between transverse stiffeners; di-
F t = allowable tensile stress, ksi (MPa) mension parallel to the direction of stress,
F t b = allowable tensile stress at temperature, ksi (MPa) Table NF-3332.3-1, in. (mm)
F v = allowable shear stress, ksi (MPa) a = distance required at ends of welded partial length
F v b = allowable shear stress at temperature, ksi (MPa) cover plate to develop stress, in. (mm)
F y c = column yield stress, ksi (MPa) b = actual width of stiffened and unstiffened compres-
F y s t = stiffener yield stress, ksi (MPa) sion elements, in. (mm)
K = effective length factor = dimensions normal to the direction of stress,
L = span length Table NF-3332.3-1, in. (mm)
= distance from center of bolt hole to edge of con- b e = effective width of stiffened compression element,
nected part, in. (mm) in. (mm)
M = moment, inkip (Nmm) (NF-3320); factored bend- b f = flange width of rolled beam or plate girder, in.
ing moment, inkip (Nmm) (NF-3340) (mm)
M = lesser of the factored moments at the ends of un- d = depth of beam or girder, in. (mm)
braced segment, inkip (Nmm) = diameter of roller or rocker bearing, in. (mm)
M 1 = smaller moment at end of unbraced length of beam = nominal diameter of fastener, in. (mm)
column, inkip (Nmm) d c = column web depth clear of fillets, in. (mm)
M 2 = larger moment at end of unbraced length of beam e = horizontal displacement, in the direction of the
column, inkip (Nmm) span, between top and bottom of simply sup-
M m = critical moment that can be resisted by a plasti- ported beam at its ends, in. (mm)
cally designed member in the absence of axial load, f = axial compression stress on member based on ef-
inkip (Nmm) fective area, ksi (MPa)
M p = plastic moment, inkip (Nmm) f a = computed axial stress, ksi (MPa)
N = length of bearing of applied load, in. (mm) f b = computed bending stress, ksi (MPa)
P = force transmitted b y a fastener, k ips ( N) f c = specified compression strength of concrete, ksi
( NF-3320); factored axial load, kips (N) (MPa)
(NF-3340); axial load, kips (N) (NF-3340) f p = computed bearing stress, ksi (MPa)
P b f = factored beam flange or connection plate force in a f t = computed tensile stress, ksi (MPa)
restrained connection f v = computed shear stress, ksi (MPa)
= the computed force delivered by the flange or mo- f v s = shear between girder web and transverse stiffen-
ment connection plate, multiplied by fivethirds ers, kips/linear in. (N/mm) of single stiffener or
for Level A loads and multiplied by fourthirds pair of stiffeners
for Level B, C, and D loads, kips (N)
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
g = transverse center to center spacing (gage) be- NF-3320 DESIGN BY LINEAR ELASTIC ANALYSIS
tween successive holes in line of stress, in. (mm) FOR CLASS 1
h = clear distance between flanges of a beam or girder NF-3321 General Design Requirements
at the section under investigation, in. (mm)
k = coefficient relating linear buckling strength of a NF-3321.1 Design and Service Conditions.
plate to its dimensions and condition of edge (a) Except as otherwise provided in this Subarticle, all
support items of the structure shall be so proportioned that the
= also distance between outer face of column flange stress, ksi (MPa), for Design and Level A Service Limits,
and web toe of its fillet if column is a rolled shape, shall not exceed the values of NF-3322. For Level B, C,
or equivalent distance if column is a welded shape, and D Service Limits, allowable stresses may be increased
in. (mm) by the factors shown in Table NF-3312.1(b)-1. Bearing
k s = slip coefficient for the particular surface condition type stress limits are excluded from rules for Level D Ser-
taken from Table NF-3324.6(a)(4)-1 vice Limits.
l = for beams, distance between cross section braced (b) To avoid column buckling in compression members,
against twist or lateral displacement of the com- local instability associated with compression flange buck-
pression flange, in. (mm) ling in flexural members, and web buckling in plate gir-
= for columns, actual unbraced length of member or ders, the allowable stress shall be limited to twothirds
unsupported length of lacing bar, in. (mm) of the critical buckling stress.
l b = actual unbraced length in plane of bending, in. NF-3321.2 Design for High Cycle Fatigue Condi-
(mm) tions. Design for high cycle fatigue conditions shall be in
l c r = critical unbraced length adjacent to plastic hinge, accordance with the requirements of NF-3330, using the
in. (mm) allowable stresses of NF-3322 as modified by NF-3332.4.
m = number of shear planes per bolt
n = number of bolts in the joint NF-3322 Design Requirements for Structural
r = governing radius of gyration, in. (mm) Steel Members
r b = radius of gyration about axis of concurrent bend-
NF-3322.1 Allowable Stresses Design and Level A
ing, in. (mm)
Service Conditions.
r c = radius of gyration of a section comprising the com-
(a) Stress in Tension. The allowable stress in tension
pression flange plus onethird of the compression
shall be as given in (1) through (3)
web area, taken about an axis in the plane of the
web, in. (mm) (1) Except for pinconnected members and threaded
r y = radius of gyration of a member about its weak axis, members used in bolting applications, F t shall be
in. (mm) 1
s = longitudinal centertocenter spacing (pitch) of
any two consecutive holes, in. (mm) but not more than 0.5 times S u on the effective net area.11
t = girder, beam, or column web thickness, in. (mm); (2) For pinconnected members, using the net area11
thickness of a connected part, in. (mm)
= wall thickness of a tubular member, in. (mm) 2
t b = thickness of beam flange or moment connection
(3) For threaded parts in tension used in bolting ap-
plate at rigid beam to column connection, in. (mm)
plications, see NF-3324.6(a)(1).
t f = flange thickness, in. (mm)
t l = thickness of thinner part joined by partial penetra- (b) Stress in Shear
tion groove weld, in. (mm) (1) Except as provided in (2) and NF-3324.6(a)(2),
x = subscript relating to bending about the strong on the crosssectional area effective in resisting shear
principal axis 3a
y = subscript relating to bending about the weak prin-
cipal axis The effective area in resisting shear of rolled and fab-
= ratio of hybrid girder web yield stress to flange ricated shapes may be taken as the overall depth times the
yield stress web thickness.
= displacement of the neutral axis of a loaded mem- (2) At the beam end connections where the top flange
ber from its position when the member is not is coped, and in similar situations where failure might oc-
loaded, in. (mm) cur by shear along a plane through the fasteners, or by a
combination of shear along a plane through the fasteners
NF-3313.2 Numbering of Equations. A separate ser-
plus tension along a perpendicular plane, on the effective
ies of equation numbers is used for each paragraph and
area in resisting tearing failure shall be
each series, beginning with eq. (1).
3b
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
The effective area is the minimum net failure surface, (-b) Where Kl/r Is Greater Than 120. The following
bounded by the bolt holes. compressive stress limit applies to bracing and secondary
(c) Stress in Compression. The allowable stress in com- members, as well as main members:
pression shall be as required by (1) through (3). The al-
lowable compressive stress for columns, except those 6b
fabricated from austenitic stainless steel, shall be as re-
quired by (1). The allowable compressive stress for col-
(3) Member Elements Other Than Columns
umns fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be
as required by (2). The allowable compressive stress for (-a) Plate Girder Stiffeners. On the gross area of
member elements other than columns constructed of plate girder stiffeners, the allowable stress in compression
any material, including austenitic stainless steel, shall be shall be
as required by (3). 7
(1) Gross Sections of Columns, Except Those Fabricated
of Austenitic Stainless Steel (-b) Webs of Rolled Shapes. On the web of rolled
shapes at the toe of the fillet, the allowable stress in com-
(-a) Where Kl/r Is Less Than Cc. On the gross sec-
pression shall be
tion of axially loaded compression members whose cross
sections meet the provisions of NF-3322.2(d), when K l/r 8
(the largest effective slenderness ratio of any unbraced
segment as defined in NF-3322.2) is less than C c , the al- For the use of stiffeners to avoid web crippling, see
lowable stress in compression shall be NF-3322.6(a).
(d) Stress in Bending. The allowable bending stress re-
sulting from tension and compression in structural mem-
4 bers shall be as required by (1) through (6).
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
6a
10
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
11 13
about their major axis are braced laterally in the region of where
compression stress at intervals not exceeding M1 /M2 = the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the
(For SI units, use ). ends of that portion of the member unbraced in
the plane of bending under consideration.
(e) Combined Stresses M 1 /M2 is positive when the member is bent
(1) Axial Compression and Bending. For members sub- in reverse curvature and negative when it is
jected to both axial compression and bending, including bent in single curvature.
bending moment resulting in secondary stress, stresses (-c) For compression members in frames braced
shall be proportioned to satisfy the requirements of eqs. against joint translation in the plane of loading and sub-
(20) through (22) jected to transverse loading between their supports, the
value of C m may be determined by rational analysis; how-
20
ever, in lieu of such analysis, the following values may be
used:
(-1) for members whose ends are restrained
against rotation in the plane of bending
21
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
both axial tension and bending stresses shall be propor-
tioned at all points along their length to satisfy the re-
22 quirements of eq. (1)(21), where f b is the computed
bending tensile stress. However, the computed bending
compressive stress, taken alone, shall not exceed the ap-
In eqs. (20) through (22), the subscripts x and y indi-
plicable value according to (d), Stress in Bending.
cate the axis of bending about which a particular stress or
design property applies, and (3) Shear and Tension. Bolts subject to combined
shear and tension shall be proportioned in accordance
with the requirements of NF-3324.
(f) Bearing on Contact Area
(1) Milled Surfaces. On contact area of milled surfaces
for all members except those fabricated of austenitic stain- and ends of fitted bearing stiffeners16 on projected area of
less steel, or pins in reamed, drilled, or bored holes, the maximum bear-
ing stress shall be
23
for members fabricated of austenitic stainless steel (in the (2) Rollers and Rockers. The maximum bearing stress,
expression for Fe, as in the case of F a , F b , and 0.60S y , Fe ksi (MPa), shall be
may be multiplied by the appropriate stress limit factor
from Table NF-3312.1(b)-1 for the particular stress cate- (U.S. Customary Units)
gory), where C m is a coefficient whose value shall be as gi-
ven in (-a) through (-c) 24a
(-a) For compression members in frames subject
to joint translation (sidesway), C m = 0.85.
(-b) For rotationally restrained compression mem- (SI Units)
bers in frames braced against joint translation and not
subject to transverse loading between their supports in 24a
the plane of bending
(3) Bolts. The maximum bearing load on projected
area of bolts in bearing connections shall be
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
channel and zee flanges, and stems of tees shall be taken
26 as the full nominal dimension; the width of flanges of I
and H shaped members and tees shall be taken as onehalf
where of the full nominal width. The thickness of a sloping flange
shall be measured at a section halfway between a free
A 1 = bearing area, in.2 (mm2) edge and the corresponding face of the web.
A 2 = full crosssectional area of concrete support, in.2
(-b) Determination of Effective Width. Unstiffened
(mm2)
elements subject to axial compression or compression
(g) Single Angle Members. Single angle members shall be due to bending shall be considered as fully effective when
designed in accordance with Mandatory Appendix NF-II. the widththickness ratio is not greater than the following:
(-1) for single angle struts and double angle
NF-3322.2 Stability and Slenderness and
struts with separators, (For SI units, use
WidthThickness Ratios.
(a) General Requirements .)
(1) General stability shall be provided for the struc- (-2) for struts comprising double angles in con-
ture as a whole and for each compression element. Design tact; angles or plates projecting from girders, columns,
consideration shall be given to significant load effects re- or other compression members; compression flanges of
sulting from the deflected shape of the structure or of in- beams; and stiffeners on plate girders, (For SI
dividual elements of the lateral load resisting system,
including the effects on beams, columns, bracing, connec- units, use .)
tions, and shear walls.
(-3) for stems of tees, (For SI units,
(2) In determining the slenderness ratio of an axially
loaded compression member, except as provided in use .)
NF-3322.1(c)(3), the length shall be taken as its effective
When the actual widththickness ratio exceeds these
length K l, and r shall be taken as the corresponding radius
values, the design stress shall be governed by the provi-
of gyration.
sions of (e).
(b) Lateral Stability (2) Stiffened Elements Under Compression
(1) Braced Frames. In frames [where lateral stability (-a) Effective Width. Stiffened compression ele-
is provided by adequate attachment to diagonal bracing ments are those having lateral support along both edges
(to shear walls), to an adjacent structure having adequate which are parallel to the direction of the compression
lateral stability, or to floor slabs (or roof decks) secured stress. The width of such elements shall be taken as
horizontally by walls or bracing systems parallel to the follows:
plane of the frame] and in trusses, the effective length fac- (-1) For webs of rolled, builtup, or formed sec-
tor K for the compression members shall be taken as 1.0, tions, h is the clear distance between flanges.
unless analysis shows that a smaller value may be used.
(-2) For webs of rolled, builtup, or formed sec-
(2) Unbraced Frames. In frames where lateral stability tions, d is the full nominal depth.
is dependent upon the bending stiffness of rigidly con- (-3) For flange or diaphragm plates in builtup
nected beams and columns, the effective length Kl of com- sections, the width b is the distance between adjacent
pression members shall be determined by a rational lines of fasteners or lines of welds.
method and shall not be less than the actual unbraced
(-4) For flanges of rectangular hollow structural
length.
sections, the width b is the clear distance between webs
(c) Maximum Slenderness Ratios less the inside corner radius on each side. If the corner ra-
(1) The slenderness ratio Kl /r of compression mem- dius is not known, the flat width may be taken as the total
bers shall not exceed 200. section width minus three times the thickness.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
29
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
29
when then
32
32
then
(-d) However, unstiffened elements of channels
(U.S. Customary Units) and tees whose proportions exceed the limits of (d)(1)
shall conform to the limits given in
30 Table NF-3322.2(e)(2)-1.
(3) Stiffened Compression Elements
(-a) When the widththickness ratio of uniformly
(SI Units) compressed stiffened elements, except for perforated cov-
er plates, exceeds the applicable limit given in (d)(2), a re-
30 duced effective width b e shall be used in computing the
flexural design properties of the section containing the
element and the permissible axial stress, except that the
ratio b e /t need not be taken as less than the applicable va-
lue permitted in (d)(2).
(-1) For the flanges of square and rectangular
(-c) For stems of tees, when sections of uniform thickness
33
(SI Units)
(SI Units)
then 33
31
Table NF-3322.2(e)(2)-1
Limiting Proportions for Channels and Tees
(SI Units)
Ratio of Flange Ratio of Flange
31 Width to Profile Thickness to Web or
Shape Depth Stem Thickness
when Builtup or rolled 0.25 3.0
channels 0.50 2.0
(U.S. Customary Units) Builtup tees 0.50 1.25
Rolled tees 0.50 1.10
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
(-2) For other uniformly compressed elements: accordingly, except that for sections otherwise symmetri-
cal, the properties may conservatively and more easily be
(U.S. Customary Units) computed using a corresponding effective area on the ten-
sion side of the neutral axis as well. That portion of the
area that is neglected in arriving at the effective area shall
34 be located at and symmetrical about the center line of the
stiffened element to which it applies.
(-b) The stress f a due to axial loading, and the ra-
(SI Units) dius of gyration r , shall be computed on the basis of actual
crosssectional area. However, the allowable axial stress
F a , as provided in (5) shall be subject to the form factor
34
where where the effective area is equal to the actual area less
b = the actual width, in. (mm), of a stiffened compres- (bbe) t.
sion element as defined in (d)(2) (5) Axially Loaded Compression Members. The allow-
f = computed compressive stress, ksi (MPa), in the stif- able stress for axially loaded compression members con-
fened elements based on the design properties as taining unstiffened or stiffened elements shall not exceed
specified in (4). If unstiffened elements are included
in the total cross section for the stiffened element, f
must be such that the maximum compressive stress
in the unstiffened element does not exceed F a Qs or 35
F b Qs, as applicable.
(-b) The allowable stress for axially loaded circular
tubular members not meeting the requirements of when the largest effective slenderness ratio of any un-
NF-3322.1(e), but having a diametertothickness ratio braced segment is less than C c or the value given by
of less than 13,000/S y (For SI units, use 89 000/S y .), shall eq. NF-3322.1(c)(1)(-b)(5) when Kl /r exceeds C c , where
not exceed either the smaller value determined by
NF-3322.1(e) or
stress F b for members containing unstiffened elements maximum width of the member, or by continuous welds
whose widththickness ratio exceeds the applicable limit having a length not less than the maximum width of the
given in (d)(1) shall be the smaller value 0.6S y Qs or that member.
provided in NF-3322.1(d)(5). (3) Intermediate Fasteners. The longitudinal spacing
for intermediate bolts or intermittent welds in builtup
NF-3322.3 Plate Girders, Rolled Beams, and Built
members shall be adequate to provide for the transfer of
Up Members.
calculated stress. The maximum longitudinal spacing of
(a) Girders and Rolled Beams. Rolled or welded shapes, bolts or intermittent welds connecting two rolled shapes
plate girders, and coverplated beams shall, in general, in contact with one another shall not exceed 24 in.
be proportioned by the moment of inertia of the gross sec- (600 mm). In addition, for painted members and un-
tion. No deduction shall be made for shop or field bolt or painted members not subject to corrosion where the out-
rivet holes in either flange provided that side component consists of a plate, the maximum
35a longitudinal spacing shall not exceed:
(-a) (For SI units, use .) times
where A f g is the gross flange area and A f n is the net flange
the thickness of the outside plate nor 12 in. (300 mm)
area, calculated in accordance with the provisions of
when fasteners are not staggered along adjacent gage
NF-3322.8.
lines;
If
(-b) (For SI units, use .) times
35b the thickness of the outside plate nor 18 in. (450 mm)
when fasteners are staggered along adjacent gage lines.
the member flexural properties shall be based on an effec-
(b) Local Slenderness Ratio. Compression members com-
tive tension flange area A f e
posed of two or more rolled shapes separated by intermit-
tent fillers shall be connected at these fillers at intervals
35c such that the slenderness ratio K l /r of either shape, be-
tween the fasteners, does not exceed 3/4 times the govern-
(b) Hybrid Girders. Hybrid girders may be proportioned ing slenderness ratio of the builtup member. The least
by the moment of inertia of their gross section, provided radius of gyration r shall be used in computing the slen-
that they are not required to resist an axial force greater derness ratio of each component part. At least two inter-
than 0.15S y times the area of the gross section, where S y mediate connectors shall be used along the length of the
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
is the yield stress of the flange material. To qualify as hy- builtup member.
brid girders, the flanges at any given section shall have the (c) Tie Plates. Open sides of compression members built
same crosssectional area and be made of the same grade up from plates or shapes shall be provided with lacing
of steel. having tie plates at each end and at intermediate points
(c) Open BoxType Beams and Grillages. When two or if the lacing is interrupted. Tie plates shall be as near to
more rolled beams or channels are used side by side to the ends as practicable. In main members carrying calcu-
form a flexural member, they shall be connected together lated stress, the end tie plates shall have a length of not
at intervals of not more than 5 ft (1.5 m). Throughbolts less than the distance between the lines of bolts or welds
and separators may be used, provided that in beams hav- connecting them to the elements of the member. Inter-
ing a depth of 12 in. (300 mm) or more, no fewer than two mediate tie plates shall have a length not less than onehalf
bolts shall be used at each separator location. When con- of this distance. The thickness of tie plates shall be not less
centrated loads are carried from one beam to the other than onefiftieth of the distance between the lines of bolts
or distributed between the beams, diaphragms having suf- or welds connecting them to the segments of the mem-
ficient stiffness to distribute the load shall be bolted or bers. In bolted construction, the spacing in the direction
welded between the beams. of stress in tie plates shall be not more than six diameters
and the tie plates shall be connected to each segment by at
NF-3322.4 Compression Members. least three fasteners. In welded construction, the welding
(a) Requirements for Fasteners on each line connecting a tie plate shall aggregate not less
(1) Transverse Spacing of Fasteners. All parts of built than onethird of the length of the plate.
up compression members and the transverse spacing of (d) Lacing. Lacing, including flat bars, angles, channels,
their lines of fasteners shall meet the requirements of or other shapes employed as lacing, shall be so spaced that
NF-3322.2. the ratio l/r of the flange included between their connec-
(2) End Fasteners. At the ends of builtup compres- tions shall not exceed 3/4 times the governing ratio for the
sion members bearing on base plates or milled surfaces, member as a whole. Lacing shall be proportioned to resist
all components in contact with one another shall be con- a shearing stress normal to the axis of the member equal
nected by bolts, spaced longitudinally not more than four to 2% of the total compressive stress in the member.
diameters apart for a distance equal to 1 1/2 times the The ratio l /r for lacing bars arranged in single systems
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
shall not exceed 140. For double lacing this ratio shall not (150 mm). The spacing of tie plates shall be such that
exceed 200. Double lacing bars shall be joined at their in- the slenderness ratio of any component in the length be-
tersections. For lacing bars in compression, the unsup- tween tie plates shall not exceed 300.
ported length of the lacing bar shall be taken as the
distance between fasteners or welds connecting it to the NF-3322.6 Webs, Flanges, and Stiffeners.
components of the builtup member for single lacing, (a) W e b s . The ratio of the clear distance between
and 70% of that distance for double lacing. The inclination flanges to the web thickness shall not exceed
of lacing bars to the axis of the member shall preferably be
not less than 60 deg for single lacing and 45 deg for double (U.S. Customary Units)
lacing. When the distance between the lines of fasteners or
welds in the flanges is more than 15 in. (381 mm), the la- 36
cing preferably shall be double or be made of angles.
(e) Perforated Cover Plates. The function of tie plates
and lacing may be performed by continuous cover plates
(SI Units)
perforated with a succession of access holes. The unsup-
ported width of such plates at access holes, as defined in
NF-3322.2(d)(2), is assumed to be available to resist axial 36
stress, provided that
(1) the widththickness ratio conforms to the limita- except that when transverse stiffeners are provided,
tions of NF-3322.2(d)(2) spaced not more than 11/2 times the girder depth, the limit-
(2) the ratio of length in direction of stress to width of ing ratio may be (For SI units, use
hole shall not exceed 2
.), where S y is the yield stress of the compres-
(3) the clear distance between holes in the direction
of stress shall be not less than the transverse distance be- sion flange.
tween nearest lines of connection bolts or welds (1) Combined Shear and Tension Stress. Plate girder
(4) the periphery of the holes at all points connecting webs which depend upon tension field action, as provided
shall have a minimum radius of 11/2 in. (38 mm) in eq. (e)(2)(45), shall be so proportioned that bending
tensile stress due to moment in the plane of the girder
NF-3322.5 BuiltUp Tension Members. web shall not exceed 0.6S y , or
(a) Longitudinal Spacing of Connectors. The longitudinal
spacing of connectors between elements in continuous
contact consisting of a plate and a shape or two plates 37
shall not exceed
(1) 24 times the thickness of the thinner plate, or
12 in. (300 mm) for painted members or unpainted mem- where
bers not subject to corrosion F v = allowable web shear stress, ksi (MPa), according to
(2) 14 times the thickness of the thinner plate, or 7 in. eq. (e)(2)(45)
(175 mm) for unpainted members of weathering steel
The allowable shear stress in the webs of girders hav-
subject to atmospheric corrosion
ing flanges and webs with yield values greater than 65 ksi
In a tension member the longitudinal spacing of fasten- (450 MP a) shall not exceed the values given by
ers and intermittent welds connecting two or more shapes eq. (e)(2)(44) if the flexural stress in the flange f b exceeds
in contact shall not exceed 24 in. (600 mm). Tension mem- 0.75F b .
bers composed of two or more shapes or plates separated
by intermittent fillers shall be connected to one another at (2) Web Crippling
these fillers at intervals such that the slenderness ratio of (-a) Local Web Yielding. Webs of beams and
either component between the fasteners does not exceed welded plate girders shall be so proportioned that the
300. compressive stress at the web toe of the fillets, resulting
(b) Perforated Cover and Tie Plates. Either perforated from concentrated loads not supported by bearing stiffen-
cover plates or tie plates without lacing may be used on ers, shall not exceed the value of 0.66S y ; otherwise, bear-
the open sides of builtup tension members. Tie plates ing stiffeners shall be provided. The governing equations
shall have a length not less than twothirds the distance shall be
between the lines of bolts or welds connecting them to (-1) for interior loads
the elements of the member. The thickness of such tie
plates shall not be less than onefiftieth of the distance be-
38
tween these lines. The longitudinal spacing of bolts or in-
termittent welds at tie plates shall not exceed 6 in.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
(-2) for end reactions concentrated compressive loads, when the compressive
force exceeds the following limits:
If the loaded flange is restrained against rotation
39
and(d c /t w )/(l /b f ) is less than 2.3
where N is greater than or equal to k for end reactions. (U.S. Customary Units)
(-b) Stress on Compression Edge of Web Plate. Bear-
ing stiffeners shall be provided in the webs of members 41a
under concentrated loads, when the compressive force ex-
ceeds the following limits:
when the concentrated load is applied at a distance
not less than d /2 from the end of the member (SI Units)
40
If the loaded flange is not restrained against rota-
tion and (d c /t w )/(l /b f ) is less than 1.7
41b
40
when the concentrated load is applied less than a distance (SI Units)
d /2 from the end of the member
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
41
where
b f = flange width, in. (mm)
d c = d 2k = web depth clear of fillets, in. (mm)
(SI Units) l = largest laterally unbraced length along either flange
at the point of load, in. (mm)
Equations (41a) and (41b) need not be checked
41
providing (d c /t w )/(l/b f ) exceeds 2.3 or 1.7, respectively,
or for webs subject to uniformly distributed load.
(b) Flanges
where (1) The thickness of outstanding parts of flanges shall
conform to the requirements of NF-3322.2(d)(1).
d = overall depth of the member, in. (mm)
S y = specified minimum yield stress of beam web, ksi (2) Flanges of welded plate girders may be varied in
(MPa) thickness or width by splicing a series of plates or by
t f = flange thickness, in. (mm) the use of cover plates.
t w = web thickness, in. (mm) (3) The total crosssectional area of cover plates of
bolted girders shall not exceed 70% of the total flange
If stiffeners are provided and extend at least one area.
half the web depth, eqs. (40) and (41) need not be (c) Flange Development
checked. (1) Highstrength bolts or welds connecting flange to
Bearing stiffeners shall be provided in the webs of web or cover plate to flange shall be proportioned to resist
members with flanges not restrained against relative the total horizontal shear resulting from the bending
movement by stiffeners or lateral bracing and subject to forces on the girder. The longitudinal distribution of these
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
bolts or intermittent welds shall be in proportion to the in- in NF-3322.1(d). The maximum stress in either flange of a
tensity of the shear, but the longitudinal spacing shall not hybrid girder shall not exceed the value given in eq. (42)
exceed the maximum permitted, respectively, for com- or
pression or tension members in NF-3322.4(a)(3) or
NF-3322.5(a). Additionally, bolts or welds connecting
flange to web shall be proportioned so as to transmit to 43
the web any loads applied directly to the flange unless
provision is made to transmit such loads by direct bearing.
(2) Partial length cover plates shall be extended be- (e) Stiffeners
yond the theoretical cutoff point and the extended por- (1) Bearing. Bearing stiffeners shall be placed in pairs
tion shall be attached to the beam or girder by high at unframed ends on the webs of plate girders and, where
strength bolts for frictiontype joints or fillet welds ade- required by (a)(2), at points of concentrated loads. Such
quate at the applicable stresses allowed in NF-3324.6(a), stiffeners, when the load normal to the flange is tensile,
NF-3324.5(d), or NF-3332.4, to develop the cover plate shall be welded to the loaded flange and when the load
portion of the flexural stresses in the beam or girder at normal to the flange is compressive may be welded or
the theoretical cutoff point. In addition, for welded cover bear on the loaded flange. They shall be designed as col-
plates, the welds connecting the cover plate termination to umns subject to the provisions of NF-3322.1, assuming
the beam or girder in the length a , defined in (-a) through the column section to comprise the pair of stiffeners and
(-c), shall be adequate at the allowed stresses to develop a centrally located strip of the web whose width is equal
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
the cover plate portion of the flexural stresses in the beam to not more than 25 times its thickness at interior stiffen-
or girder at the distance a from the end of the cover plate. ers, or a width equal to not more than 12 times its thick-
The length a measured from the end of the cover plate, ness when the stiffeners are located at the end of the web.
shall be The effective length shall be taken as not less than three
(-a) a distance equal to the width of the coverplate fourths of the length of the stiffeners in computing the ra-
when there is a continuous weld equal to or larger than tio l /r . Only that portion of the stiffener outside of the
threefourths of the plate thickness across the end of the flange angle fillet or the flange to web welds shall be con-
plate and continuous welds along both edges of the cover sidered effective in bearing.
plate in the length a (2) Average Web Shear. Except as provided herein, the
(-b) a distance equal to 11/2 times the width of the largest average web shear f v , ksi (MPa), computed for any
cover plate when there is a continuous weld smaller than condition of complete or partial loading, shall not exceed
threefourths of the plate thickness across the end of the the value given by eq. (44)
plate and continuous welds along both edges of the cover
plate in the length a (U.S. Customary Units)
(-c) a distance equal to two times the width of the
44
cover plate when there is no weld across the end of the
plate, but continuous welds along both edges of the cover
plate in the length a
(SI Units)
(d) R e d u c t i o n i n F l a n g e S t r e s s . W h e n t h e w e b
depththickness ratio exceeds (for SI units, 44
use ), the maximum stress in the compression
flange shall not exceed where, when C v is less than 0.8,
42
42
where F b is the applicable bending stress, ksi (MPa), given when C v is greater than 0.8,
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
where
(U.S. Customary Units)
D = 1.0 for stiffeners furnished in pairs
= 1.8 for single angle stiffeners
= 2.4 for single plate stiffeners
(-c) When the greatest shear stress f v in a panel is
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
less than that permitted by eq. (2)(45), this gross area re-
quirement may be reduced proportionately.
(SI Units)
(-d) I n t e r m e d i a t e s t i f f e n e r s r e q u i r e d b y
eq. (2)(45) shall be connected for a total shear transfer,
kips/linear in. (N/linear mm) of single stiffener or pair
of stiffeners, not less than that computed by eq. (47)
45
This shear transfer may be reduced in the same
proportion that the largest computed shear stress f v in
(3) Intermediate Stiffeners the adjacent panels is less than that permitted by
eq. (2)(45). However, bolts and welds in intermediate stif-
(-a) Subject to the limitations of (a), intermediate
feners which are required to transmit to the web an ap-
stiffeners are not required when the ratio h /t is less than
plied concentrated load or reaction shall be
260 and the maximum web shear stress f v is less than that
proportioned for not less than the applied load or reaction.
permitted for F v by eq. (2)(44).
(-b) The spacing of intermediate stiffeners, when (-e) Intermediate stiffness may be stopped short of
stiffeners are required, shall be such that the web shear the tension flange, provided bracing is not needed to
stress will not exceed the value for F v given by eq. transmit a concentrated load or reaction; the weld by
(2)(44) or eq. (2)(45), as applicable, and the ratio a /h which intermediate stiffeners are attached to the web shall
shall not exceed [260/(h /t)]2 or 3. be terminated not closer than four times nor more than six
(-c) In girders designed on the basis of tension times the web thickness from the near toe of the web to
field action, the spacing between stiffeners at end panels, flange welds. When single stiffeners are used, they shall
at panels containing large holes, and at panels adjacent to be attached to the compression flange, if it consists of a
panels containing large holes shall be such that f v does not rectangular plate, to resist any uplift tendency due to tor-
exceed the value for F v given by eq. (2)(44). sion in the plate. When lateral bracing is attached to a stif-
(4) Moment of Inertia and Gross Area fener or a pair of stiffeners, these, in turn, shall be
connected to the compression flange to transmit 1% of
(-a) The moment of inertia, in.4 (mm4), of a pair of
the total flange stress, unless the flange is composed only
intermediate stiffeners or a single intermediate stiffener,
of angles.
with reference to an axis in the plane of the web, shall
not be less than (h /50)4. (-f) Bolts connecting stiffeners to the girder web
(-b) The gross area, in.2 (mm 2), of intermediate shall be spaced not more than 12 in. (300 mm) on center.
stiffeners spaced as required for eq. (2)(45) (total area, If intermittent fillet welds are used, the clear distance be-
when stiffeners are furnished in pairs), shall be not less tween welds shall not be more than 16 times the web
than that computed by eq. (46) thickness, or more than 10 in. (250 mm).
(f) Splices. Groove welded splices in the plate girders
and beams shall develop the full strength of the smaller
46 spliced section; other types of splices in cross sections of
plate girders and in beams shall develop the strength re-
quired by the stresses at the point of splice.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
(g) Rotational Restraint at Points of Support. Beams, gir- (-d) The effective net area A e of axially loaded ten-
ders, and trusses shall be restrained against rotation about sion members, where the load is transmitted by bolts
their longitudinal axis at points of support. through some but not all of the crosssectional elements
of the member, shall be computed from the following
NF-3322.7 Simple and Continuous Spans, and Provi- equation:
sion for Expansion.
(a) Design Requirements for Spans
(1) Simple Spans. Beams, girders, and trusses shall or-
Unless a larger coefficient can be justified by tests
dinarily be designed on the basis of simple spans whose
or other recognized criteria, the following values of C t
effective length is equal to the distance between centers
shall be used in computations:
of gravity of the members to which they deliver their
end reactions. (-1) W, M, or S shapes with flange widths not
less than twothirds of the depth, and structural tees cut
(2) Continuous Spans. When designed on the assump-
from these shapes, provided the connection is to the
tion of full or partial end restraint, due to continuous,
flanges and has no fewer than three fasteners per line in
semicontinuous, or cantilever action, the beams, girders,
the direction of applied stress
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(-e) Bolted splice and gusset plates, and other con- (-e) Thickness limitations on both eyebars and pin
nection fittings subject to tensile force shall be designed in connected plates may be waived whenever external nuts
accordance with the provisions of NF-3322.1(a) where the are provided so as to tighten pin plates and filler plates
effective net area shall be taken as the actual net area, ex- into snug contact. When the plates are thus contained,
cept that for the purpose of design calculations it shall not the allowable stress in bearing shall be no greater than
be taken as greater than 85% of the gross area. as specified in NF-3322.1(f)(1).
(2) Size of Bolt Holes. In computing net area, the dia-
NF-3322.9 Rectangular Tubular Sections. For elec-
meter of a bolt hole shall be taken as 1/16 in. (1.5 mm)
tric resistance welded rectangular tubular sections, the
greater than the nominal dimension of the hole normal
designer shall use a wall thickness of 0.93 times the nom-
to the direction of applied stress.
inal wall thickness for calculating section properties.
(3) Angles. For angles, the gross width shall be the
sum of the widths of the legs less the thickness. The gage
for holes in opposite legs shall be the sum of the gages NF-3323 Design Requirements for Steel Castings
from the back of angles less the thickness. and Forgings
(4) PinConnected Members NF-3323.1 Allowable Stresses. Allowable stresses for
(-a) Eyebars shall be of uniform thickness without steel castings and forgings shall be the same as those pro-
reinforcement at the pinholes.20 They shall have circular vided in NF-3322 with the applicable values for yield
heads in which the periphery of the head beyond the pin- strength of Table Y1, Section II, Part D, Subpart 1.
hole is concentric with the pinhole. The radius of transi-
tion between the circular head and the body of the NF-3324 Design Requirements for Connections
eyebar shall be equal to or greater than the diameter of and Joints
the head. The width of the body of the eyebar shall not ex-
NF-3324.1 General Requirements.
ceed eight times its thickness and the thickness shall not
be less than 1/2 in. (13 mm). The minimum net area beyond (a) Types of Connections Permitted. Structural Connec-
the pin hole, parallel to the axis of the member, shall not be tions of a welded, bolted, or welded and bolted type shall
less than 2/3 of the net area across the pin hole. The thick- be used.
ness may be less than 1/2 in. (13 mm) only if external nuts Types of bolted connections include
are provided to tighten pin plates and filler plates into (1) Frictiontype connections that are mechanically
snug contact. The diameter of the pin shall not be less than fastened structural connections that use high strength
seveneighths of the width of the body of the eyebar. The bolts (such as SA-325 and SA-490) and are sufficiently
diameter of the pinhole shall not be more than 1/32 in. tightened to reliably produce a high clamping force that
(0.8 mm) greater than the diameter of the pin. For steels prevents slip between faying surfaces. Load is transferred
having a yield stress greater than 70.0 ksi (480 MPa), at the faying surfaces by friction [Figure NF-3324.1(a)(1)].
the diameter of the pinhole shall not exceed five times (2) Bearingtype connections that are mechanically
the plate thickness. fastened structural connections that depend on direct
(-b) In pinconnected plates other than eyebars, shear of the fastener to transfer the load from one con-
the tensile stress on the net area transverse to the axis nected part to another.
of the member shall not exceed the stress allowed in (3) Other connections that are not covered by (1) and
NF-3322.1(a), and the bearing stress on the projected area (2), such as clamps and Ubolts shown in
of the pin shall not exceed the stress allowed in Figure NF-1214-1, are not frictiontype connections and
NF-3322.1(f)(1). The minimum net area beyond the pin- shall meet the requirements of NF-3380, unless otherwise
hole, parallel to the axis of the member, shall not be less indicated in the design documents.
than twothirds of the net area across the pinhole. (b) Provision for Eccentric Connections. Axially stressed
(-c) The distance used in calculations, transverse members meeting at a point shall have their gravity axes
to the axis of pinconnected plates or any individual ele- intersect at a point if practicable; if not, provision shall
ment of a builtup member, from the edge of the pinhole be made for bending stresses due to the eccentricity.
to the edge of the member or element shall not exceed 4 (c) Placement of Bolts and Welds. Except as otherwise
times the thickness at the pinhole. For calculation pur- provided, groups of bolts or welds at the ends of any mem-
poses, the distance from the edge of the pinhole to the ber transmitting axial stress into that member shall have
edge of the plate or to the edge of a separated element their centers of gravity on the gravity axis of the member,
of a builtup member at the pinhole, shall not be assumed unless provision is made for the effect of the resulting ec-
to be more than 0.8 times the diameter of the pinhole. centricity. Except in members subject to repeated varia-
(-d) The corners beyond the pinhole may be cut at tion in stress, as stipulated in NF-3330, disposition of
45 deg to the axis of the member, provided the net area fillet welds to balance the forces about the neutral axes
beyond the pinhole, on a plane perpendicular to the cut, for end connections of single angle, double angle, and simi-
is not less than that required beyond the pinhole parallel lar type members is not required. Eccentricity between
to the axis of the member. the gravity axes of such members and the gage lines for
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Figure NF-3324.1(a)(1)
Typical FrictionType Connections Using High Strength Bolts
48
(-d) The weld joining stiffeners to the column web
shall be sized to carry the force in the stiffener caused by
unbalanced moments on opposite sides of the column.
(3) Notwithstanding the requirements of (2), a stif- (5) The thickness of column webs within the bound-
fener or a pair of stiffeners shall be provided opposite aries of rigid connections of two or more members whose
the compression flange when the column web depth clear webs lie in a common plane shall not be less than
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
wise moments, kipft (Nmm), applied on opposite stress and shall be long enough to avoid overstressing
sides of the connection boundary the filler along the toe of the weld. Any filler less than
1
t m i n = the web thickness, in. (mm) /4 in. (6 mm) thick shall have its edges made flush with
the edges of the splice plate, and the weld size shall be
When the web thickness is less than t m i n doubler the sum of the size necessary to carry the splice plate
plates or longitudinal stiffeners may be provided to rein- stress plus the thickness of the filler plate.
force the column web.
(c) Connections of Tension and Compression Members in NF-3324.4 Joint Combinations.
Trusses. The connections at ends of the tension or com- (a) Combinations of Welds. If two or more of the general
pression member in trusses shall develop the force due types of weld (groove, fillet, plug, or slot) are combined in
to the Design Load but not less than 50% of the effective a single joint, the effective capacity of each shall be sepa-
strength of the member, based upon the kind of stress that rately computed with reference to the axis of the group,
governs the selection of the member. in order to determine the allowable capacity of the
(d) Connections for Compression Members With Bearing combination.
Joints (b) Bolts in Combination With Welds. SA-307 bolts or
(1) For members subjected to compression forces high strength bolts used in bearingtype connections shall
only, which bear on bearing plates, sufficient bolts or not be considered as sharing the stress in combination
welds shall be provided to hold all parts securely in place. with welds. Welds, if used, shall be provided to carry the
(2) For members subjected to compression forces entire stress in the connection. High strength bolts in-
only, which are finished to bear at splices, the splice mate- stalled as a frictiontype connection prior to welding
rial and its bolting or welding shall be arranged to hold all may be considered as sharing the stress with the welds.
parts in line and shall be proportioned for 50% of the com-
NF-3324.5 Design of Welded Joints.
puted stress.
(3) All of the foregoing joints shall be proportioned to (a) Permissible Types of Welded Joints in Linear Supports.
resist any tension that would be developed by design mo- All welded joints in Linear Supports shall be as described
ments acting in conjunction with 75% of the axial com- in NF-3256.1 except that intermittent or lap joints using
pression forces. fillet welds may not be used for the support of Class 1
Components or Class 2 vessels designed to NC3200.
NF-3324.3 Design of Lap Joints and Fillers. The allowable stress limits shall be as defined in (b) and
(a) Lap Joint Design. The minimum amount of lap on lap (c).
joints shall be five times the thickness of the thinner part (b) Design Limits. The allowable stress limits that must
joined but not less than 1 in. (25 mm). Lap joints subjected be satisfied for welds for Design Loadings stated in the De-
to axial stress shall be fillet welded along the end of both sign Specification shall be as follows:
lapped parts, except where the deflection of the lapped
(1) Full Penetration Groove Welds. The stress limits
parts is sufficiently restrained to prevent opening of the
for full penetration groove welds shall not exceed the ap-
joint under maximum loading.
plicable stress value for the base metal being joined, as
(b) Filler Design
specified in NF-3321.1 and Table NF-3324.5(a)-1.
(1) Bolted Construction. When bolts carrying com-
puted stress pass through fillers thicker than 1/4 in. (2) Partial Penetration Groove Welds
(6 mm), except in frictiontype connections assembled (-a) Compression Normal to Effective Throat or
with highstrength bolts, the fillers shall be extended be- Shear on Effective Throat. The stress limits shall be the
yond the splice material and the filler extension shall be same as those for the base metal, as required by
secured by enough bolts to distribute the total stress in NF-3321.1.
the member uniformly over the combined section of the (-b) Tension Normal to the Axis on the Effective
member and the filler or an equivalent number of fasten- Throat. The stress limits shall be as specified in
ers shall be included in the connection. Fillers between Table NF-3324.5(a)-1.
1
/4 in. (6 mm) and 3/4 in. (19 mm) thick, inclusive, need (3) Fillet Welds. The allowable stress limits for fillet
not be extended and developed, provided the allowable welds shall be as specified in Table NF-3324.5(a)-1.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Table NF-3324.5(a)-1
Allowable Stress Limits for Class 1 LinearType Support Welds
Base Metal TS Range, Weld Metal Min. TS, ksi
Kind of Stress ksi (MPa) (MPa) [Note (1)] Stress Limits, ksi (MPa)
Tension and compression parallel to axis Same as for base metal
of any full penetration groove weld
Tension normal to effective throat of full Same as allowable tensile stress
penetration groove weld for base metal
Compression normal to effective throat Same as allowable compressive
of full penetration groove weld and stress for base metal
partial penetration groove weld
Shear stress on effective throat of fillet 4560 (310410) 60 (410) 0.30 minimum tensile strength
weld, regardless of direction of 6170 (411480) 70 (480) of weld metal [ksi (MPa)],
application of load; tension normal to 71 80 (481550) 80 (550) except shear stress on base
the axis on the effective throat of a 8190 (551620) 90 (620) metal shall not exceed
partial penetration groove weld and 91100 (621690) 100 (690) 0.40 yield stress of base
shear stress on effective area of a plug 101120 (691830) 120 (830) metal
or slot weld. The given stresses shall
also apply to such welds made with
the specified electrode on steel having
a yield stress greater than that of the
matching base metal.
NOTE:
(1) Weld metal one nominal strength level stronger than shown will be permitted (e.g., E70xx for E60xx applications).
(c) Service Limits, Level A Through D, and Test. The rules (3) Length of Fillet Welds
and stress limits which must be satisfied for welds for any (-a) The effective length of a fillet weld shall be the
Level A through D Service and Test Loading stated in the overall length of a fullsize fillet, including returns.
Design Specification are those given in (b) multiplied by
(-b) The minimum effective length of a strength fil-
the appropriate base material stress limit factor given in
let weld shall be not less than four times the nominal size,
Table NF-3312.1(b)-1.
or else the size of the weld shall be considered not to ex-
(d) Fillet Welds ceed onefourth of its effective length.
(1) Minimum Size of Fillet Welds and Partial Penetra- (-c) If longitudinal fillet welds are used alone in
tion Welds. Fillet and partial penetration welds shall not be end connections of tension members, the length of each fil-
specified less than 1/8 in. (3 mm) (NF-4427). When fillet or let weld shall be not less than the perpendicular distance
partial penetration welds less than 1/4 in. (6 mm) are used between them. The transverse spacing of longitudinal fillet
to join heavy section members, the designer shall consider welds used in end connections shall not exceed 8 in.
specifying preheat and special requirements for fitup of (200 mm), unless the design otherwise prevents excessive
members to ensure adequate weld deposition. transverse bending in the connection.
(2) Maximum Effective Size of Fillet Welds. The maxi- (4) Effective Throat Thickness of Fillet Welds. The ef-
mum size of a fillet weld that may be assumed in the de- fective throat thickness of a fillet weld joining members
sign of a connection shall be such that the stresses in the at angles between 60 deg and 135 deg, inclusive
adjacent base material do not exceed the values allowed (Figure NF-4427-1), shall be the shortest distance from
in Tables NF-3324.5(a)-1 and NF-3321.1. The maximum the root to the face of the diagrammatic weld, except that
size that may be used along edges of connected parts shall for fillet welds made by the submerged arc process the ef-
be as stipulated in (-a) and (-b) fective throat thickness shall be taken equal to the leg size
(-a) along edges of material less than 1/4 in. (6 mm) for 3/8 in. (10 mm) and smaller fillet welds, and equal to
thick, the maximum size may be equal to the thickness of the theoretical throat plus 0.11 in. (2.8 mm) for fillet welds
the material over 3/8 in. (10 mm). For fillet welds joining members at
(-b) along edges of material 1/4 in. (6 mm) or more angles less than 60 deg use the rules for partial penetra-
in thickness, the maximum size shall be 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) tion groove welds, (f)(3).
less than the thickness of the material, unless the weld (5) Effective Area of Fillet Welds. The effective area of
is especially designated on the drawings to be built up fillet welds shall be considered as the effective length of
to obtain full throat thickness the weld times the effective throat thickness.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
(6) Effective Area of Fillet Welds in Holes and Slots. The than 21/4 times the thickness of the weld. The ends of
effective area of fillet welds in holes and slots shall be the slot shall be semicircular or shall have the corners
computed as specified in (5) for fillet welds using for effec- rounded to a radius not less than the thickness of the part
tive length the length of center line of the weld through the containing it, except for those ends which extend to the
center of the plane through the throat. However, in the edge of the part.
case of overlapping fillets the effective area shall not ex- (5) Spacing of Slot Welds. The minimum spacing of
ceed the nominal crosssectional area of the hole or slot lines of slot welds in a direction transverse to their length
in the plane of the faying surface.
shall be four times the width of the slot. The minimum cen-
(7) Intermittent Fillet Welds. Intermittent fillet welds
ter to center spacing in a longitudinal direction on any line
may be used to transfer calculated stresses across a joint
shall be two times the length of the slot.
or faying surface, when the strength required is less than
that developed by a continuous fillet weld of the smallest (6) Thickness of Plug and Slot Welds. The thickness of
permitted size, and to join elements of builtup members. plug and slot welds in material 5/8 in. (16 mm) or less in
The effective length of any segment of intermittent fillet thickness shall be equal to the thickness of the material.
welding shall not be less than four times the weld size with In material over 5/8 in. (16 mm) in thickness, it shall be
a minimum of 11/2 in. (38 mm). at least onehalf the thickness of the material but not less
(8) End Returns to Fillet Welds. Side or end fillet welds than 5/8 in. (16 mm).
terminating at ends or sides, respectively, of parts or (7) Effective Shearing Area of Plug and Slot Welds. The
members shall, when required by the designer, be re- effective shearing area of plug and slot welds shall be con-
turned continuously around the corners for a distance sidered as the nominal crosssectional area of the hole or
not less than twice the nominal size of the weld. This pro- slot in the plane of the faying surface.
vision shall apply to side and top fillet welds connecting
(f) Full Penetration and Partial Penetration Joints. The
brackets, beam seats, and similar connections, on the
effective area shall be the effective weld length multiplied
plane about which bending moments are computed. For
by the effective throat thickness.
framing angles and simple endplate connections which
depend upon flexibility of the outstanding legs for connec- (1) The effective weld length for any groove weld,
tion flexibility, end returns shall not exceed four times the square or skewed, shall be the length of weld throughout
nominal size of the weld. Fillet welds which occur on op- which the correct proportioned cross section exists. In a
posite sides of a common plane shall be interrupted at curved weld it shall be its true length measured along
the corner common to both welds. End returns, when re- its curvature.
quired by the designer, shall be indicated on the drawings. (2) The effective throat thickness of a full penetration
(9) Fillet Welds in Holes and Slots. Fillet welds in holes groove weld which shall conform to the requirements of
or slots may be used to transmit shear in lap joints or to NF-4000 shall be the thickness of the thinner part joined.
prevent the buckling or separation of lapped parts and No increase is permitted for weld reinforcement.
to join elements of builtup members. Such fillet welds
(3) The effective throat of partial penetration groove
may overlap, subject to the provisions of (6). Fillet welds
welds is dependent upon the type of groove.
in holes or slots are not to be considered plug or slot
welds. (-a) For square, U, and J groove welds, the effective
(e) Plug and Slot Welds. throat is equal to the depth of preparations.
(1) Use of Plug and Slot Welds. Plug and slot welds (-b) For V and bevel groove welds with an included
may be used to transmit shear in a lap joint or to prevent angle at the root equal to or greater than 60 deg, the effec-
buckling of lapped parts and to join component parts of tive throat shall be the minimum distance from the root to
builtup members. the face of the weld.
(2) Diameter of Holes for Plug Welds. The diameter of (-c) For V and bevel groove welds with an included
the holes for a plug weld shall be not less than the thick- angle at the root less than 60 deg but equal to or greater
ness of the part containing it plus 5/16 in. (8 mm), rounded than 45 deg, the effective throat shall be the minimum dis-
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
to the next greater odd 1/16 in. (1.5 mm), nor greater than tance from the root to the face of the weld less 1/8 in.
the minimum diameter plus 1/8 in. (3 mm) or 21/4 times the (3 mm).
thickness of the weld metal.
(3) Spacing of Plug Welds. The minimum centerto (-d) For V and bevel groove welds, with an in-
center spacing of plug welds shall be four times the dia- cluded angle at the root less than 45 deg but equal to or
meter of the hole. greater than 30 deg, the effective throat shall be the mini-
(4) Length of Slot Welds. The length of slot for a slot mum distance from the root to the face of the weld less
1
weld shall not exceed 10 times the thickness of the weld. /8 in. (3 mm) and multiplied by 0.75. The required effec-
The width of the slot shall be not less than the thickness of tive throat must be specified on the drawing.
the part containing it plus 5/16 in. (8 mm), rounded to the (-e) For V and bevel groove welds, angles less than
next greater odd 1/16 in. (1.5 mm), nor shall it be greater 30 deg at the root are not allowed.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
(-f) For flare bevel groove welds, when filled flush For austenitic steels
to the surface, the effective throat shall be 0.31 times the
outside radius of the curved section forming the groove.
For formed rectangular tubing, the outside radius may
be considered as two times the wall thickness.
The applied load shall be the sum of the external load
(-g) For flare V groove welds, when filled flush to and any tension resulting from prying action produced
the surface, the effective throat shall be 0.5 (except use by deformation of the connected parts.
0.375 for GMAW when R 1/2 in. (13 mm) times the out-
side radius when the outside radius is less than 1 in. (2) Shearing Stress Only
(25 mm). For flare bevel groove welds, the effective throat (-a) BearingType Joints
shall be 0.312 times the outside radius. (-1) Threads Excluded From Shear Planes. The al-
(-h) Consideration of Lamellar Tearing. Welded lowable shear F v b in bolts and threaded parts loaded in di-
joint configurations causing significant throughthickness rect shear, expressed in ksi (MPa) of actual shear stress
tensile stress [as defined in NF-1215(b)] during fabrica- area available (applicable to the total nominal bolt area
tion and/or service on rolled product forms should be in the shear planes in this case), shall not exceed
avoided. However, if this type of construction is used, For ferritic steels
the designer should consider one or several of the follow-
ing factors that may reduce the susceptibility of the joint
to experience lamellar tearing and provide documenta-
tion, including fabrication requirements, in the Design
Output Documents: For austenitic steels
(-1) Reduce volume of weld metal to the extent
practical.
(-2) Select materials that are resistant to lamel-
lar tearing. (-2) Threads Not Excluded From Shear Planes.
(-3) Invoke any of the special fabrication re- The allowable shear stress F v b in bolts and threaded parts
quirements of NF-4441. loaded in direct shear, expressed in ksi (MPa) of actual
shear stress area available (applicable to the total bolt root
NF-3324.6 Design Requirements for Bolted Joints.
area in the shear planes in this case), shall not exceed
The rules and stress limits for bolting shall be as given
in this paragraph. The stress limits which must be satisfied For ferritic steels
for any Design, Levels A through D, and Test Loadings,
shall be those given in this paragraph, multiplied by the
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
appropriate stress limit factors given in
Table NF-3225.2-1 for the particular Loading specified in For austenitic steels
the Design Specification (NCA3250). This product shall
not exceed the yield strength of the material at
temperature.
(a) Allowable Stresses. Allowable tensile, shearing, and
bearing stresses in bolts and threaded parts shall be as gi- (3) Combined Tensile and Shear Stresses
ven in the paragraphs below. All allowables are expressed (-a) BearingType Joints. Bolts subjected to com-
in ksi (MPa) acting on the actual bolt area available in the bined shear and tension shall be so proportioned that
shear planes of the connected parts. All are expressed in either the shear or the tensile stress, ksi (MPa) of actual
terms of the ultimate tensile strength at temperature crosssectional area, shall not exceed the value derived
(Table U, Section II, Part D, Subpart 1). The shear capacity from the ellipse equation below when the corresponding
of bolts is directly proportional to the shear area available computed tensile or shearing stress is substituted
in the shear planes. Shear strength is unaffected by shear
plane location.
(1) Tensile Stress Only. Bolts loaded in direct tension
shall be so proportioned that their average tensile stress
F t b , computed on the basis of the actual tensile stress area The allowable tensile and shear stress values shall
available (independent of any initial tightening force), be those derived from the equations given in (1) and (2).
shall not exceed (-b) FrictionType Joints. A bolt in a connection de-
For ferritic steels signed as a frictiontype joint is not subjected to shear
(provided the joint does not slip into bearing); it experi-
ences tension only. Frictiontype joints shall be designed
as given in (4).
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
NOTES:
(b) Minimum Edge Distance (1) All edge distances in this column may be reduced 1/8 in.
(1) Minimum Edge Distance in Line of Load. In both (3.2 mm) when the hole is at the point where stress does
not exceed 25% of the maximum allowed stress in the
bearing and frictiontype joints the minimum distance
element.
from the center of the end bolt in a connection to that edge (2) These may be 11/4 in. (32 mm) at the ends of beam connec-
of the connected part toward which the load is directed tion angles.
shall be determined in accordance with either (-a) or (-b).
(-a) The edge distance shall satisfy all of the
following:
For unpainted, builtup members made of weathering
(-1) L /d 0.5 + 1.43 (f p /S u )
steel which will be exposed to atmospheric corrosion,
(-2) L /d 1.2
the spacing of fasteners connecting a plate and a shape
(-3) f p /S u 1.5
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-3330 HIGH CYCLE FATIGUE DESIGN FOR NF-3332.5 Provisions for Mechanical Fasteners.
CLASS 1 Range in tensile stress in properly tightened ASTM A325
NF-3331 Introduction or ASTM A490 bolts need not be considered, but the max-
imum computed stress, including prying action, shall not
NF-3331.1 Scope. Members and their connections, exceed the values given in NF-3332.4 subject to the follow-
subject to a number of cycles (>20,000) of fatigue loading ing stipulations:
resulting in damage as defined in NF-3331.2, shall be pro-
portioned to satisfy the stress range limitations provided (a) Connections subject to more than 20,000 cycles, but
therein. not more than 500,000 cycles of direct tension may be de-
NF-3331.2 Definitions. High cycle fatigue, as used in signed for the stress produced by the sum of applied and
this Subsubarticle, is defined as the damage that may re- prying loads if the prying load does not exceed 10% of the
sult in fracture after a sufficient number of fluctuations externally applied load. If the prying force exceeds 10%,
of stress. Stress range is defined as the numerical sum of the allowable tensile stress given in NF-3324.6(a)(1) shall
maximum repeated tensile and compressive stresses or be reduced 40%, applicable to the external load alone.
the sum of maximum shearing stresses of opposite direc-
tion at a given point, resulting from differing arrange- (b) Connections subject to more than 500,000 cycles of
ments of live load. direct tension may be designed for the stress produced by
the sum of applied and prying loads if the prying load does
NF-3332 Design Requirements not exceed 5% of the externally applied load. If the prying
NF-3332.1 Design Considerations. In the design of force exceeds 5%, the allowable tensile stress given in
members and connections subject to repeated variation NF-3324.6(a)(1) shall be reduced 50%, applicable to the
of live load stress, consideration shall be given to the num- external load alone. The use of other bolts and threaded
ber of stress cycles, the expected range of stress, and the parts subject to tensile fatigue loading is not recom-
type and location of member or detail. mended. Bolts and threaded parts subjected to cyclic load-
ing in shear may be designed for the bearingtype shear
NF-3332.2 Classification of Loading Conditions. stresses given in NF-3324.6(a)(2) insofar as the fatigue
Loading conditions shall be classified as shown in strength of the fasteners is concerned.
Table NF-3332.2-1.
NF-3332.3 Stress Categories. Stress categories for
use in establishing the maximum range of stress in rela-
tion to the type of member or part, material, and location
shall be as stipulated in Table NF-3332.3-1. For illustra-
tions of the members and parts, see Figure NF-3332.3-1. NF-3340 LIMIT ANALYSIS DESIGN FOR CLASS 1
NF-3332.4 Allowable Stresses. The maximum stress NF-3341 Introduction
shall not exceed the basic allowable stress permitted by
NF-3341.1 Scope.
NF-3322 and the maximum range of stress shall not ex-
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ceed that given in Table NF-3332.4-1. (a) Subject to the limitation of this Subsubarticle, simple
or continuous beams, rigid frames, and similar portions of
structures rigidly constructed so as to be continuous over
at least one interior support21 may be proportioned on the
Table NF-3332.2-1
basis of plastic design, namely, on the basis of low bound
Classification of Loading Conditions
collapse load. This strength, as determined by rational
Loading Number of Loading Cycles analysis, shall not be less than that required to support a
Condition From To factored load equal to 1.7 times those of the level A and
1 20,000 [Note (1)] 100,000 [Note (2)] Level B Service Limits or 1.3 times that of the Level C Ser-
2 100,000 500,000 [Note (3)] vice Limits.
3 500,000 2,000,000 [Note (4)]
4 >2,000,000
(b) Connections joining a portion of a structure de-
NOTES: signed on the basis of plastic behavior with a portion
(1) Approximately equivalent to two applications every day not so designed need be no more rigid than ordinary seat
for 25 years. and cap angle or ordinary web connections.
(2) Approximately equivalent to ten applications every day
for 25 years. (c) When plastic design is used as the basis for propor-
(3) Approximately equivalent to 50 applications every day
tioning continuous beams and structural frames, the pro-
for 25 years.
(4) Approximately equivalent to 200 applications every day visions relating to allowable working stress contained in
for 25 years. NF-3320 are waived. Except as modified by these rules,
all other provisions of NF-3320 shall govern.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Table NF-3332.3-1
Stress Categories
Illustrative Example
Kind of [Note (2)] Sketch Nos.
Stress Stress Category (See (See
Situation [Note (1)] Table NF-3332.4-1) Figure NF-3332.3-1)
General Condition Plain material
Base metal with rolled or cleaned surfaces T or Rev. A (1), (2)
General Condition Built-up members
Base metal and weld metal in members, without T or Rev. B (3) through (6)
attachments, built up plates or shapes connected by
continuous full or partial penetration groove welds, or
continuous fillet welds parallel to the direction of
applied stress
Base metal in members without attachments, builtup T or Rev. B (3) through (6)
plates or shapes connected by continuous
fullpenetration groove welds or by continuous fillet
welds parallel to the direction of applied stress
Calculated flexural stress f b in base metal at toe of welds T or Rev. C (7)
on girder webs or flanges adjacent to welded transverse
stiffeners
Base metal at ends of partial length welded cover plates
narrower than the flange having square or tapered ends,
with or without welds across the ends or wider than
flange with welds across the ends
Flange thickness 0.8 in. (20 mm) T or Rev. E (5)
Flange thickness > 0.8 in. (20 mm) T or Rev. E (5)
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Table NF-3332.3-1
Stress Categories (Cont'd)
Illustrative Example
Kind of [Note (2)] Sketch Nos.
Stress Stress Category (See (See
Situation [Note (1)] Table NF-3332.4-1) Figure NF-3332.3-1)
General Condition Groove welds
Base metal and weld metal at full penetration groove T or Rev. B (10)
welded splices of parts of similar cross section ground
flush, with grinding in the direction of applied stress
and with weld soundness established by radiographic
or ultrasonic inspection in accordance with the
requirements of Table 9.25.3 of AWS D1.177
Base metal and weld metal at full penetration groove T or Rev. B (12), (13)
welded splices at transitions in width or thickness, with
welds ground to provide slopes no steeper than 1 to
21/2, with grinding in the direction of applied stress, and
with weld soundness established by radiographic or
ultrasonic inspection in accordance with the
requirements of Table 9.25.3 of AWS D1.177
Base metal and weld metal at full penetration groove T or Rev. C (10) through (13)
welded splices, with or without transitions having
slopes no greater than 1 to 21/2, when reinforcement is
not removed and with weld soundness established by
radiographic or ultrasonic inspection in accordance
with the requirements of Table 9.25.3 of AWS D1.177
General Condition Partial penetration groove welds
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Weld metal of partial penetration transverse groove T or Rev. F [Note (4)] (16)
welds, based on effective throat area of the weld or
welds
General Condition Plug or slot welds
Base metal at plug or slot welds T or Rev. E (27)
Shear on plug or slot welds S F (27)
General Condition Attachments
Base metal at details attached by fullpenetration groove
welds subject to longitudinal and/or transverse loading
when the detail embodies a transition radius R with the
weld termination ground smooth and for transverse
loading, the weld soundness established by
radiographic or ultrasonic inspection in accordance
with 9.25.2 or 9.25.3 of AWS D1.1
Longitudinal loading
R > 24 in. (600 mm) T or Rev. B (14)
24 in. (600 mm) > R > 6 in. (150 mm) T or Rev. C (14)
6 in. (150 mm) > R > 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. D (14)
2 in. (50 mm) > R T or Rev. E (14)
Detail base metal for transverse loading: equal
thickness and reinforcement removed
R > 24 in. (600 mm) T or Rev. B (14)
24 in. (600 mm) > R > 6 in. (150 mm) T or Rev. C (14)
6 in. (150 mm) > R > 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. D (14)
2 in. (50 mm) > R T or Rev. E (14), (15)
Detail base metal for transverse loading: equal
thickness and reinforcement not removed
R > 24 in. (600 mm) T or Rev. C (14)
24 in. (600 mm) > R > 6 in. (150 mm) T or Rev. C (14)
6 in. (150 mm) > R > 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. D (14)
2 in. (50 mm) > R T or Rev. E (14), (15)
Detail base metal for transverse loading: unequal
thickness and reinforcement removed
R > 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. D (14)
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Table NF-3332.3-1
Stress Categories (Cont'd)
Illustrative Example
Kind of [Note (2)] Sketch Nos.
Stress Stress Category (See (See
Situation [Note (1)] Table NF-3332.4-1) Figure NF-3332.3-1)
General Condition Attachments (Cont'd)
2 in. (50 mm) > R T or Rev. E (14), (15)
Detail base metal for transverse loading: unequal
thickness and reinforcement not removed
all R T or Rev. E (14), (15)
Detail base metal for transverse loading
R > 6 in. (150 mm) T or Rev. C (19)
6 in. (150 mm) > R > 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. D (19)
2 in. (50 mm) > R T or Rev. E (19)
Base metal at detail attached by fullpenetration groove
welds subject to longitudinal loading
2 < a < 12b or 4 in. (100 mm) T or Rev. D (15)
a > 12b or 4 in. (100 mm) when b 1 in. (25 mm) T or Rev. E (15)
a > 12b or 4 in. (100 mm) when b > 1 in. (25 mm) T or Rev. E (15)
Base metal at detail attached by fillet welds or
partialpenetration groove welds subject to longitudinal
loading
a 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. C (15), (23) through (26)
2 in. (50 mm) < a 12b or 4 in. (100 mm) T or Rev. D (15), (23), (24), (26)
a > 12b or 4 in. (100 mm) when b 1 in. (25 mm) T or Rev. E (15), (23), (24), (26)
a > 12b or 4 in. (100 mm) when b > 1 in. (25 mm) T or Rev. E (15), (23), (24), (26)
Base metal attached by fillet welds or partialpenetration
groove welds subjected to longitudinal loading when
the weld termination embodies a transition radius with
the weld termination ground smooth:
R > 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. D (19)
R 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. E (19)
Filletwelded attachments where the weld termination
embodies a transition radius, weld termination ground
smooth, and main material subject to longitudinal
loading:
Detail base metal for transverse loading:
R > 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. D (19)
R 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. E (19)
Base metal at studtype shear connector attached by fillet T or Rev. C (22)
weld or automatic end weld
Shear stress on nominal area of studtype shear S F
connectors
NOTES:
(1) T signifies range in tensile stress only; Rev. signifies a range involving reversal of tensile or compressive stress; S signifies range
in shear, including shear stress reversal.
(2) These examples are provided as guidelines and are not intended to exclude other reasonably similar situations.
(3) When stress reversal is involved, use of SA-307 bolts is not recommended.
(4) Allowable fatigue stress range for transverse partial penetration and transverse fillet welds is a function of the effective throat,
depth of penetration and plate thickness. See Frank and Fisher, Fatigue Strength of Fillet Welded Cruciform Joints, Journal of
the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 105, No. 519, 1979.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Figure NF-3332.3-1
Illustrative Examples
(1)
(8)
(2)
(3)
(9)
(4) (10)
Plate as shown
or wider than B E or E' Category
flange (11)
(5)
(12)
(6)
(13)
(7)
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Figure NF-3332.3-1
Illustrative Examples (Cont'd)
Groove weld
(14) (21)
(15) a
(22)
(16)
b (avg.)
(23)
b = thickness
(17) a
b
(18) (24)
a
b
Groove or fillet weld
(19)
(25)
a a
(26)
b
(20) b
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(27)
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Table NF-3332.4-1
Allowable Stress Ranges
Allowable Range of Stress, F s r , ksi (MPa)
Stress Category Used in Loading Condition 1, Loading Condition 2, Loading Condition 3, Loading Condition 4,
Table NF-3332.3-1 Fsr1 Fsr2 Fsr3 Fsr4
A 63 (430) 37 (255) 24 (165) 24 (165)
B 49 (340) 29 (200) 18 (125) 16 (110)
B 39 (270) 23 (160) 15 (100) 12 (85)
C 35 (240) 21 (145) 13 (90) 10 (70) [Note (1)]
D 28 (195) 16 (110) 10 (70) 7 (50)
E 22 (150) 13 (90) 8 (55) 5 (35)
E 16 (110) 9 (60) 6 (40) 3 (20)
F 15 (100) 12 (85) 9 (60) 8 (55)
NOTE:
(1) Flexural stress range of 12 ksi (83 MPa) permitted at toe of stiffener welds on webs or flanges.
1
when
(SI Units)
3
when
when
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
60 (413) 6.3
65 (448) 6.0 8
(SI Units)
The thickness of sloping flanges may be taken as their
average thickness. 8
(2) The widththickness ratio of similarly com-
pressed flange plates in box sections and cover plates shall
(c) Basis for Maximum Strength Determination. For one
not exceed . For this purpose the or two story frames, the maximum strength may be deter-
width of a cover plate shall be taken as the distance be- mined by a routine plastic analysis procedure, and the
tween longitudinal lines of connecting high strength bolts frame instability effect P may be ignored. For braced
or welds. multistory frames, provisions should be made to include
NF-3342.2 Specific Design Requirements. the frame instability effect in the design of the bracing sys-
(a) Beams. The maximum bending strength of a flexural tem and frame members. For unbraced multistory frames,
member shall be the frame instability effect should be included directly in
the calculations for maximum strength. The vertical bra-
4 cing system for a plastically designed braced multistory
frame shall be shown to be adequate, as determined by
(b) Columns a rational analysis, to prevent buckling of the structure un-
(1) In the plane of bending of columns which would der factored gravity load, and maintain the lateral stability
develop a plastic hinge at ultimate loading, the slender- of the structure, including consideration of the overturn-
ness ratio l/r shall not exceed C c defined in NF-3322.1(c). ing effects of drift, under factored horizontal and gravity
(2) The maximum strength of an axially loaded com- loads.
pression member shall be taken as (1) Stability of Braced Frames. The vertical bracing
5
system may be considered to function together with in-
plane shearresisting exterior and interior walls, floor
where A is the gross area of the member, and F a , as slabs, and roof decks, if these walls, slabs, and decks are
defined by eq. NF-3322.1(c)(1)(-a)(4) , is based upon the secured to the structural frames. The columns, girders,
applicable slenderness ratio. beams, and diagonal members, when used as the vertical
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
NF-3350 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 2 AND NF-3382.1 Nomenclature. The symbols used in this
MC paragraph are defined as follows:
The design by analysis of Class 2 and MC supports shall F a l l = allowable value for the type of stress in
be in accordance with NF-3320 and NF-3340. NF-3310, ksi (MPa)
Kl = load rating coefficient for supports in
NF-3360 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 3 compression
The design by analysis of Class 3 supports shall be in ac- Su ( a c t ) = actual tensile strength of the material used in
cordance with NF-3320 and NF-3340. the part or support which had reached ultimate
capacity during the test, ksi (MPa)
NF-3370 EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS Sy ( a c t ) = actual yield strength of the material used in the
Supports of all types may be designed by experimental part or support which yielded during the test,
stress analysis in accordance with Appendix II of Section ksi (MPa)
III Appendices. T L u = support test load at which a substantial in-
crease in load displacement results in zero or
NF-3380 DESIGN BY LOAD RATING negative increase in actual support load
NF-3381 Procedure for Load Rating T L y = support test load at or below yield
The procedure for load rating shall consist of imposing a NF-3382.2 LinearType Supports. The load ratings 13
total load on one or more duplicate fullsize samples for a for LinearType Supports for the Service Loadings shall
support equal to or less than the load under which the be determined by the following equations:
support fails to perform its required function. Fullsize Design and Level A Limits (lower of the two values)
samples composed of various parts may have each part
or a number of parts load rated provided that all parts
in the load path are either load rated or otherwise quali- 1
fied per NF-3300 or by experimental stress analysis. When
parts are connected by bolting or welding, the connection
shall be either load rated or qualified per NF-3225 or
NF-3226. Should more than one part be load rated in a sin- 2
gle load test, then the load rating equations of NF-3380
shall be evaluated for each part using the parts S y(act)
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
and Su(act) values. The part having the lowest load rating Test and Level B Limits (lower of the two values)
shall establish the load rating for the combination of parts.
A single test sample is permitted, but in that case, the load
ratings shall be decreased by 10%. Otherwise, tests shall 3
be run on a statistically significant number of samples.
The permissible types of welded joints shall be as per-
mitted for the specific class of construction in
NF-3226.1, NF-3256.1, NF-3266, and NF-3324. The re-
4
quirements of NF-3324.5(b) for size of fillet and partial
penetration welds do not apply, provided the fullsize
sample is fabricated for testing using the minimum weld
Level C Limits (lower of the two values)
stipulated in the Design Drawings. Bolted joints in the test
sample shall be made up using the lowest strength bolt
material and minimum edge distance allowed by the 5
specification.
test temperature. The load rating shall be determined by NF-3411.1 Standard Supports Used as Component
the following equations: Supports. Standard Supports may be used as component
Design and Level A Limits supports, as defined in NF-3500.
range. Deviation is the sum of kinematic friction and man- (c) The Design Specification shall contain, as a mini-
ufacturing tolerance factors. Determination of deviation is mum, the following:
by load test machine and is calculated as follows: (1) the Design Loadings for loading conditions and
transients, and combinations of loadings for which the
snubber is designed to accommodate
(2) r e q u i r e d f o r c e , t i m e , a n d d i s p l a c e m e n t
relationship
(3) the environmental conditions that the snubber
will be exposed to, such as
(-a) temperature
NF-3412.2 Variable Support Spring Hangers. Vari- (-b) irradiation
able support spring hangers may be used to support pip- (-c) corrosive atmosphere
ing or components at those locations subject to vertical (-d) moisture
movement due to temperature differences. The variability (-e) airborne particles
factor of the supporting force is calculated by the follow- (4) consideration of material characteristics, such as
ing equation: (-a) compatibility
(-b) stability
(-c) fire resistance
The recommended maximum variability factor is 0.25. (-d) wear
(a) The variability factor of the supporting force result- (-e) aging
ing from movement of the piping or component shall be (5) tests which are required prior to installation
considered in the loadings used in the stress analysis of (d) Design of functional members such as interconnec-
the piping or component. tions, tubing and fittings reservoirs, and flow distributors
(b) Variable support spring hangers shall be provided shall consider the effect of internal pressure, thermal ex-
with means to limit misalignment, buckling, and eccentric pansion, and vibration loading.
loading and to prevent overstressing of the spring. NF-3412.5 Dampers. Dampers provide similar sys-
(c) It is recommended that all hangers employing tem behavior as snubbers and can be used to mitigate dy-
springs be provided with means to indicate at all times namic events. Dampers shall meet the requirements of
the compression of the spring with respect to the appro- NF-3412.4.
priate hot and cold positions of the piping or component.
NF-3412.3 Hanger Rods. Design loads for threaded NF-3420 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 1
hanger rods shall be based on the root area of the threads. NF-3421 General Design Requirements
In no case shall hanger rods less than 3/8 in. (10 mm) dia- The design of Class 1 Standard Supports shall be in ac-
meter be used for supporting pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and cordance with the requirements of NF-3420 using one of
smaller, or less than 1/2 in. (13 mm) diameter rod for sup- the design procedures indicated in Table NF-3131(a)-1
porting pipe NPS 21/2 (DN 65) and larger. Pipe, structural for Class 1 construction.
shapes, or bars may be used instead of hanger rods. Hang-
er rods, structural shapes, etc., shall be designed to permit NF-3422 Design of Plate and ShellType
the free movement of piping as indicated in the thermal Standard Supports
stress analysis. The possibility of moment loading of hang-
er rods or shapes as a result of pipe motion shall be con- The requirements of NF-3200 shall be met.
sidered and avoided unless the support is specifically
designed for such loading.
NF-3423 Design of LinearType Standard
Supports
NF-3412.4 Snubbers.22
The requirements of NF-3300 shall be met.
(a) Snubbers may be incorporated in the system design
to accommodate Design Mechanical Loads or conditions of NF-3425 Design of Bolting
a vibratory or dynamic nature. Snubbers may be attached
to a piping or component to protect it against dynamic The requirements of NF-3225 and NF-3324.6 shall be
type loading. Snubbers shall allow essentially free move- met.
ment of the piping or component to which they are at-
tached during nondynamic application of load such as NF-3426 Design of Welded Joints
that imposed by expansion and contraction. NF-3426.1 Permissible Types. The permissible types
(b) Snubbers shall be carefully applied to ensure that of welded joints for Standard Supports are described in
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
they will perform their intended function without placing paragraphs NF-3226.1 and NF-3256.1. Additional types
unacceptable loads on the piping system or other of joints are as follows. Typical examples of the types
components. are shown in Figure NF-3426.1-1.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Figure NF-3426.1-1
Additional Permissible Welded Joints for Class 1 Standard Supports
(a) Tee Joints. Tee joints shall be one of the following: (2) Fillet welds between the edge of a plate and the
(1) fillet, double welded, sketch (a1). end surface of a closed tubular section or partially closed
tubular section or partially closed formed section,
(2) fillet, single welded, when double members are
sketches (b), (c), and (d). In addition, weld joints (b) and
used, sketch (a2).
(d) may be used only if the lengths of the respective legs
(3) fillet, single welded, between a flat surface and the of the fillet weld are equal to the exposed thickness of
end surface of a closed tubular section or a closed formed the plate and shell elements. Partially closed tubular sec-
section, sketch (f). Partially closed tubular sections or par- tions or partially closed formed sections as well as the to-
tially closed formed sections and the total length of their tal length of their respective welds shall encompass a
respective welds shall encompass a minimum of 270 deg minimum of 270 deg of the circumference and provide
of the circumference and provide symmetrical loadings symmetrical loadings on closure plates.
on closure plates.
(3) The use of welded joints permitted by (a)(3) and
(b) Corner Joints. Corner joints shall be one of the (b) is limited to housings for spring encapsulation of stan-
following: dard supports.
(1) Partial penetration, without a fillet weld between
the edge of a plate and the end surface of a closed tubular
section or partially closed formed section, sketch (e). Par- NF-3426.2 Design Stress Intensity and Allowable
tially closed tubular sections or partially closed formed Stress Limits for Welded Joints. The limit of design stress
sections as well as the total length of their respective intensity or of allowable stress for welded joints for Stan-
welds shall encompass a minimum of 270 deg of the cir- dard Supports shall not exceed the applicable design
cumference and provide symmetrical loadings on closure stress intensity value or allowable stress value for the
plates. base metal being joined.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
NF-3450 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 2 NF-3520 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 1
NF-3451 General Design Requirements NF-3521 General Design Requirements
The design of Class 2 Standard Supports shall be in ac- This Subsubarticle provides stress limits for elements of
cordance with the requirements of NF-3450 using one of Class 1 component supports. For general requirements as
the design procedures indicated in Table NF-3131(a)-1. to stress determinations, definitions, derivations of stress
intensities, and classification of stresses, refer to NF-3120.
NF-3452 Design of Plate and ShellType
Standard Supports NF-3522 Design of Plate and ShellType
Component Supports
The requirements of NF-3200 shall be met.
(a) The design rules and stress intensity limits which
must be satisfied for the Design and Service Loadings
NF-3453 Design of LinearType Standard are given in NF-3220.
Supports (b) When design by analysis is used, the stress limit fac-
The requirements of NF-3300 shall be met. tors for each loading and stress category are specified in
Table NF-3221.2-1.
NF-3500 DESIGN RULES FOR COMPONENT NF-3550 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 2, 3,
SUPPORTS AND MC
NF-3510 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS NF-3552 Design of Plate and ShellType
The design of component supports shall be in accor- Component Supports
dance with this Subarticle and the applicable general re- (a) The design rules and stress limits which must be sa-
quirements of NF-3110, NF-3210, NF-3310, and tisfied for the Design and Service Loadings are given in
NF-3410. NF-3250 and NF-3260.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
16 (400) 27 (8.2) 35 (10.6)
The design of Standard Component Supports shall be in 20 (500) 30 (9.1) 39 (11.8)
accordance with NF-3524. 24 (600) 32 (9.7) 42 (12.8)
NF-3623 Design of LinearType Piping Supports NF-3650 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 2
(a) The design rules and stress limits which must be sa- AND 3
tisfied for the Design and Service Loadings are given in NF-3652 Design of Plate and ShellType Piping
NF-3320. Supports
(b) When design by analysis is used, the stress limit fac-
tors for each loading and stress category are specified in (a) The design rules and stress limits which must be sa-
Table NF-3312.1(b)-1. tisfied for the Design and Service Loadings are given in
NF-3250 and NF-3260.
NF-3624 Design of Standard Piping Supports (b) When design by analysis is used, the stress limit fac-
tors for each loading and stress category are specified in
(a) The design rules and stress limits which must be sa- Table NF-3251.2-1.
tisfied for the Design and Service Loadings are given in
NF-3420.
(b) When design by analysis is used, the stress limit fac- NF-3653 Design of LinearType Piping Supports
tors for each loading and stress category are specified in The design rules and stress limits which must be satis-
Table NF-3221.2-1 or Table NF-3312.1(b)-1 , as fied for the Design and Service Loadings are given in
applicable. NF-3623.
ARTICLE NF-4000
FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION
NF-4100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS be repeated by the Certificate Holder on test specimens ta-
ken from test coupons which have been taken and treated
NF-4110 INTRODUCTION in accordance with the requirements of NF-2000.
NF-4111 Fabrication and Installation
Supports shall be fabricated and installed in accordance NF-4122 Material Identification
with the requirements of this Article and shall be manufac- Material for supports shall carry identification markings
tured from material which meets the requirements of which will remain distinguishable until the support is fab-
NF-2000. ricated or installed. If the original identification markings
are cut off or the material is divided, the marks shall be ac-
NF-4112 Reassembly of Subsection NF Supports curately transferred to the parts or a coded marking shall
The Certificate Holder may reassemble supports from be used to assure identification of each piece of material
completed supports that have not been in operating ser- during subsequent fabrication or installation, unless
vice or from parts and material of disassembled supports otherwise provided by NF-2150. Material supplied with
that have not been in operating service, provided all re- a Certificate of Compliance and welding and brazing mate-
quired documentation is available and the applicable Code rial shall be identified and controlled so that they can be
requirements are met. traced to each support, or else a control procedure shall
The program for maintaining identification of material be employed which ensures that the specified material is
and parts, including material documentation and certifica- used.
tion documents (Certificate of Compliance and NS1 Certi-
ficate of Conformance) shall be described in a written NF-4123 Visual Examinations
procedure. Visual examination activities that are not referenced for
examination by other specific Code paragraphs, and are
NF-4120 CERTIFICATION OF MATERIALS AND performed solely to verify compliance with requirements
FABRICATION BY SUPPORT of NF-4000, may be performed by the persons who per-
CERTIFICATE HOLDER form or supervise the work. These visual examinations
NF-4121 Means of Certification are not required to be performed by personnel and proce-
dures qualified to NF-5500 and NF-5100, respectively, un-
The NS Certificate Holder for a support shall certify less so specified.
Code compliance by the furnishing of an NS1 Certificate
of Conformance (NCA3687) for welded supports or a Cer-
NF-4125 Testing of Welding and Brazing
tificate of Compliance (NCA3689) for nonwelded
Materials
supports.
All welding and brazing materials shall meet the re-
NF-4121.1 Certification of Treatments, Tests, and
quirements of NF-2400.
Examinations. If the Certificate Holder performs treat-
ments, tests, repairs, or examinations required by other
Articles of this Section, he shall certify that he has fulfilled
NF-4130 REPAIR OF MATERIAL
that requirement [NCA3861(c)]. Reports of all required NF-4131 Elimination and Repair of Defects
treatments and the results of all required tests, repairs, Material originally accepted on delivery in which de-
and examinations performed by the NS Certificate Holder fects exceeding the limits of NF-2500 are known or discov-
shall be maintained as quality assurance records in accor- ered during the process of fabrication or installation is
dance with NCA4134.17. unacceptable. The material may be used provided the con-
NF-4121.2 Repetition of Tensile or Impact Tests. If dition is corrected in accordance with the requirements of
during the fabrication or installation of the support the NF-2500 for the applicable product form, except
material is subjected to heat treatment that has not been (a) weld repair is not required if the defect is removed
covered by treatment of the test coupons (NF-2200) and by mechanical means and does not reduce the section be-
that may reduce either the tensile or impact properties be- low the minimum thickness required by NF-3000
low the required values, the tensile and impact tests shall (b) when weld repair is performed
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
(1) the weld repair restores the section to the mini- (a) hotformed material, such as forgings, in which the
mum thickness required by NF-3000 hot forming is completed by the Material Organization
(2) the limitation on the depth of weld repair does not prior to removal of the impact test specimens
apply (b) hotformed material represented by test coupons
(3) the time of examination of weld repairs to weld which has been subjected to heat treatment representing
edge preparations and to material shall be in accordance the hot forming procedure and the heat treatments to be
with NF-5120 applied to the parts
(4) the provisions of NF-2610(e) for weld repair of (c) material which does not require impact tests in ac-
structural material apply cordance with NF-2300
(d) material which has final strain less than 0.5%
(e) material where the final strain is less than that of a
NF-4200 FORMING, FITTING, AND ALIGNING previously qualified procedure for that material
(f) material from which the impact testing required by
NF-4210 CUTTING, FORMING, AND BENDING NF-2300 is performed on each heat and lot, as applicable,
NF-4211 Cutting after forming
Material may be cut to shape and size by mechanical NF-4213.2 Procedure Qualification Test. The proce-
means such as machining, shearing, or chipping, or by dure qualification test shall be performed in the manner
grinding or thermal cutting. Thermally cut edges that are stipulated in (a) through (f).
to be welded shall be smooth and free of all loose scale (a) The tests shall be performed on three different heats
and slag accumulations. of material both before and after straining to establish the
effects of the forming and subsequent heat treatment
NF-4211.1 Preheating Before Thermal Cutting. operations.
When thermal cutting is performed to prepare weld joints
(b) Specimens shall be taken in accordance with the re-
or edges, to remove attachments or defective material, or
quirements of NF-2000 and shall be taken from the ten-
for any other purpose, consideration shall be given to pre-
sion side of the strained material.
heating the material using preheat schedules, such as sug-
(c) The percent strain shall be established by the fol-
gested in Appendix D (Section III Appendices).
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
lowing equations:
For cylinders:
NF-4212 Forming and Bending Processes
Any process may be used to hot or cold form or bend
materials, including weld metal, provided the required di-
mensions are attained (see NF-4214 and NF-4220), and For spherical or dished surfaces
provided the specified impact properties of the material,
when required, are not reduced below the minimum spe-
cified values or they are effectively restored by heat treat-
ment following the forming operation. Hot forming is For pipe
defined as forming with the material temperature higher
than 100F (56C) below the lower transformation tem-
perature of the material. When required, the process shall where
be qualified for impact properties as outlined in NF-4213.
R = nominal bending radius to the center line of the
pipe, in. (mm)
NF-4213 Qualification of Forming Processes for R f = final radius to center line of shell, in. (mm)
Impact Property Requirements R o = original radius (equal to infinity for a flat part), in.
When impact testing is required by the Design Specifica- (mm)
tions, a procedure qualification test shall be conducted r = nominal radius of the pipe, in. (mm)
using specimens taken from material of the same material t = nominal thickness, in. (mm)
specification, grade or class, heat treatment, and with simi-
(d) The procedure qualification shall simulate the max-
lar impact properties as required for the material in the
imum percent surface strain, employing a bending process
support. These specimens shall be subjected to the equiva-
similar to that used in the fabrication of the material or by
lent forming or bending process and heat treatment as the
direct tension on the specimen.
material in the support. Applicable tests shall be con-
(e) Sufficient Charpy Vnotch specimens shall be taken
ducted to determine that the required impact properties
from each of three heats of material to establish a transi-
of NF-2300 are met after straining.
tion curve showing in both the upper and lower shelves.
NF-4213.1 Exemptions. Procedure qualification tests On each of these three heats, tests consisting of three im-
are not required for material listed in (a) through (f) pact specimens shall be conducted at a minimum of five
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
different temperatures distributed throughout the transi- NF-4230 FITTING AND ALIGNING
tion region. The upper and lower shelves may be estab- NF-4231 Fitting and Aligning Methods
lished by the use of one test specimen each, depending
on the product form. Parts that are to be joined may be fitted, aligned, and re-
(f) Using the results of the impact test data from each of tained in position during the joining operation by the use
three heats, taken both before and after straining, deter- of bars, jacks, clamps, drift pins, tack welds, or temporary
mine either attachments. Mechanical devices shall be carefully used to
(1) the maximum change in NDT temperature along avoid damage to surfaces of the parts and to avoid enlar-
with gement of bolt holes.
(-a) the maximum change of lateral expansion and NF-4231.1 Tack Welds. Tack welds used to secure
energy of the temperature under consideration or alignment shall either be removed completely, when they
(-b) the maximum change of temperature at the have served their purpose, or their stopping and starting
lateral expansion and energy levels under consideration ends shall be properly prepared by grinding or other sui-
or table means so that they may be satisfactorily incorpo-
(2) when lateral expansion is the acceptance criterion rated into the final weld. Tack welds shall be made by
(NF-2300), either the maximum change in temperature or qualified welders using qualified welding procedures.
the maximum change in lateral expansion When tack welds are to become part of the finished weld,
NF-4213.3 Acceptance Criteria for Formed Material. they shall be visually examined and defective tack welds
To be acceptable, the formed material used in the support removed.
shall have impact properties before forming sufficient to NF-4231.2 Column Bases.
compensate for the maximum loss of impact properties (a) Column bases shall be set level and to correct eleva-
due to the qualified forming procedure used. tion with full bearing on the masonry.
NF-4213.4 Requalification. A new procedure qualifi- (b) Column bases shall be finished in accordance with
cation test is required when any of the following changes the requirements of (1) through (3).
are made: (1) Rolled steel bearing plates 2 in. (50 mm) or less in
(a) the actual postweld heat treatment time at tempera- thickness may be used without milling, provided a satis-
ture is greater than previously qualified considering factory contact bearing is obtained. Rolled steel bearing
NF-2211; if the material is not postweld heat treated, plates over 2 in. (50 mm) but not over 4 in. (100 mm)
the procedure must be qualified without postweld heat in thickness may be straightened by pressing or, if presses
treatment are not available, by milling for all bearing surfaces except
(b) the maximum calculated strain of the material ex- those noted in (3) to obtain satisfactory contact bearing.
ceeds the previously qualified strain by more than 0.5% Rolled steel bearing plates over 4 in. (100 mm) in thick-
(c) where preheat over 250F (120C) is used in the ness shall be milled for all bearing surfaces except as
forming or bending operation but not followed by a subse- noted in (3).
quent postweld heat treatment (2) Column bases other than rolled steel bearing
plates shall be planed for all bearing surfaces, except as
NF-4214 Minimum Thickness of Fabricated noted in (3).
Material (3) The bottom surfaces of bearing plates and column
bases which are grouted to ensure full bearing contact on
If any fabrication operation reduces the thickness below
foundation need not be planed.
the minimum required to satisfy the rules of NF-3000, the
material may be repaired in accordance with NF-4130.
11/4% of the overall design dimension. Such deviations Section Thickness, in. (mm) Maximum Allowable Offset
shall not include abrupt changes. Up to 3/4 (19), Incl. 1
/4t
Over 3/4 to 11/2 (19 to 38), Incl. 3
/16 in. (5 mm)
(b) For plate and shelltype supports which are skirts,
Over 11/2 to 6 (38 to 150), Incl. 1
/8t
the difference between the maximum and minimum out- Over 6 (150) 3
/4 in. (19 mm)
side diameters shall not exceed 1% of the nominal outside
diameter.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
NF-4232 Maximum Offset of Aligned Sections (a) temporary attachments are removed in accordance
with the provisions of NF-4435(b)
Alignment of butt joints shall be such that the maximum
offset of the finished weld will not be greater than the ap- (b) the energy output for permanent nonstructural at-
plicable amount listed in Table NF-4232-1, where t is the tachments such as strain gages and thermocouples is lim-
nominal thickness of the thinner section of the joint. ited to 125 W-sec and the minimum thickness of the
material to which the attachment is made is greater than
NF-4232.1 Fairing of Offsets. Any offset within the 0.09 in. (2.3 mm)
allowable tolerance of Table NF-4232-1 shall be blended (c) a Welding Procedure Specification is prepared de-
uniformly over the width of the finished weld or, if neces- scribing the capacitor discharge equipment, the combina-
sary, by adding additional weld metal beyond what would tion of materials to be joined, and the technique of
otherwise be the edge of the weld. application; qualification of the welding procedure is not
required
NF-4240 REQUIREMENTS FOR WELDED JOINTS
Butt welds may be made with or without backing or NF-4311.4 Inertia and Continuous Drive Friction
consumable insert rings. When the use of permanent back- Welding.
ing rings is undesirable [NF-3226.1(a) or NF-3256.1(a)] (a) Inertia and continuous drive friction welding shall
(a) the backing ring shall be removed and the inside of not be used for fabrication of Class 1 Plate and ShellType
the joint ground smooth Component Supports.
(b) the joint shall be welded without backing rings or (b) The weld between the two members shall be a full
(c) consumable insert rings shall be used penetration weld.
and certified by the Certificate Holder by signature or NF-4330 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
some other method of control in accordance with the Cer- WELDING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION
tificate Holders Quality Assurance Program. TESTS
NF-4322.1 Identification of Joints for Class 1 Com- NF-4331 Conformance to Section IX
ponent Supports. Requirements
(a) For Class 1 Plate and ShellType, and LinearType All welding procedure qualification tests shall be in ac-
Component Supports, the welder or welding operator cordance with the requirements of Section IX as supple-
shall apply the identification mark assigned to him by mented by the requirements of this Article.
the Certificate Holder on or adjacent to all permanent
welds, including fillet welds, at 3 ft (1 m) intervals or less, NF-4334 Preparation of Test Coupons and
except as noted in (b). The marking shall be done with Specimens
either blunt nose continuous or blunt nose interrupted
(a) Removal of test coupons from the test weld and the
dot die stamps. As an alternative, the Certificate Holder
dimensions of specimens made from them shall conform
shall keep a record of permanent welded joints in a com-
to the requirements of Section IX, except that the removal
ponent support, and of the welders and welding operators
of impact test coupons and the dimensions of impact test
used in making each of the joints.
specimens shall be in accordance with (b).
(b) For partial penetration welds with a depth less than (b) Weld deposit of each process in a multiple process
1 in. (25 mm) and fillet welds with a throat dimension less weld shall, where possible, be included in the impact test
than 1 in. (25 mm) in primary members, and for all welds specimens. When each process cannot be included in the
in secondary members, the Certificate Holder need not fullsize impact test specimen at the 1/4t location required
identify the welder or welding operator who welded each by this Section, additional fullsize specimens shall be ob-
joint provided tained from locations in the test weld that will ensure that
(1) the Certificate Holder maintains a system that will at least a portion of each process has been included in full
identify the welders or welding operators who made such size test specimens. As an alternative, additional test
welds on each item welds can be made with each process so that fullsize spe-
(2) the welds in each category are all of the same type cimens can be tested for each process.
and configuration and are welded with the same Welding
NF-4334.1 Coupons Representing the Weld Depos-
Procedure Specification
its. Impact test specimen and testing methods shall con-
NF-4322.2 Identification of Other Joints. For all form to NF-2321. The impact specimen shall be located
types of Class 2, 3, and MC component supports and for so that the longitudinal axis of the specimen is at least
1
all classes of piping supports and Standard Supports, the /4t, and where the thickness of the test assembly permits,
Certificate Holder shall certify that only welders and weld- not less than 3/8 in. (10 mm) from the weld surface of the
ing operators qualified in accordance with NF-4321 were test assembly. In addition, when the postweld heat treat-
used in making all welds. ment temperature exceeds the maximum temperature
specified in NF-4620, and the test assembly is cooled at
NF-4322.3 Identification of Tack Welds. The identi- an accelerated rate, the longitudinal axis of the specimen
fication of welder or welding operator is not required shall be a minimum of t from the edge of the test assembly.
for tack welds. The specimen shall be transverse to the longitudinal axis
of the weld with the area of the notch located in the weld.
The length of the notch of the Charpy Vnotch specimen
NF-4323 Welding Prior to Qualification shall be normal to the surface of the weld.
No welding shall be undertaken until after the welding NF-4334.2 Coupons Representing the HeatAffected
procedures which are to be used have been qualified. Only Zone. Where impact tests of the heataffected zone are re-
welders and welding operators who are qualified in accor- quired by NF-4335.2, specimens shall be taken from the
dance with NF-4320 and Section IX shall be used. welding procedure qualification test assemblies in accor-
dance with (a) through (c).
(a) If the qualification test material is in the form of a
NF-4324 Transferring Qualifications
plate or a forging, the axis of the weld shall be oriented
The welding procedure qualifications and the perfor- either parallel to or perpendicular to the principal direc-
mance qualification tests for welders and welding opera- tion of rolling or forging.
tors conducted by one Certificate Holder shall not (b) The heataffected zone impact test specimens and
qualify welding procedures and shall not qualify welders testing methods shall conform to NF-2321. The specimens
or welding operators to weld for any other Certificate shall be removed from a location as near as practical to a
Holder, except as provided in Section IX, QW201 and depth midway between the surface and center thickness.
QW300.2. The coupons for heataffected zone impact specimens
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
shall be taken transverse to the axis of the weld and etched (b) The impact test requirements and acceptance stan-
to define the heataffected zone. The notch of the Charpy dards for welding procedure qualification weld metal shall
Vnotch specimen shall be cut approximately normal to be the same as specified in NF-2330 for the base material
the material surface in such a manner as to include as to be welded or repaired. Where two materials which have
much heataffected zone as possible in the resulting frac- different fracture toughness requirements are to be joined
ture. Where the material thickness permits, the axis of a by welding, the test requirements and acceptance stan-
specimen may be inclined to allow the root of the notch dards of either material may be used for the weld metal,
to align parallel to the fusion line. When a grain refining except where otherwise specified by NCA1280 or other
heat treatment is not performed on welds made by the parts of this Section.
electroslag or electrogas welding process, the notch for (c) A Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) qualified
the impact specimens shall be located in the grain coar- to the impact testing requirements of Subsection NB, NC,
sened region. or NE may be accepted as an alternative to the WPS impact
(c) For the comparison of heataffected zone values testing requirements of this Subsection.
with base material values [NF-4335.2(b)], Charpy Vnotch
NF-4335.2 Impact Tests of HeatAffected Zone.
specimens shall be removed from the unaffected base ma-
(a) Charpy Vnotch tests of the heataffected zone of the
terial at approximately the same distance from the base
welding procedure qualification test assembly are re-
material surface as the heataffected zone specimens.
quired whenever the thickness of the weld exceeds
The axis of the unaffected base material specimens shall 5
/8 in. (16 mm), and either of the base materials requires
be parallel to the axis of the heataffected zone specimens,
impact testing in accordance with the rules of NF-2310.
and the axis of the notch shall be normal to the surface of
Exemption of base materials by NF-2311(b)(9) or
the base material.
NF-2311(b)(10) does not apply to the welding procedure
qualification of the heataffected zone or unaffected base
NF-4335 Impact Test Requirements material for such materials. The only exceptions to the re-
quirements are the following:
When materials are required to be impact tested per (1) the qualification for welds in PNos. 1 and 3 and
NF-2300, impact tests of the weld metal and heataffected SA-336 F12 materials that are postweld heat treated and
zone shall be performed in accordance with the following are made by any process other than electroslag, electro-
subparagraphs. Exemptions from impact testing under gas, or thermit
NF-2311(b)(9) and NF-2311(b)(10) do not apply to weld (2) the qualification for weld deposit cladding or
metal unless the specific weld metal used is included in hardfacing on any base material
Table NF-2311(b)-1 (weld metal exemptions are being de-
(3) that portion of the heataffected zone associated
veloped). Exemption from impact testing of the
with GTAW root deposits with a maximum of two layers
heataffected zone of those base materials which are ex-
or 3/16 in. (5 mm) thickness, whichever is less
empted by NF-2311(b)(9) and NF-2311(b)(10) is not per-
(b) Charpy Vnotch testing shall be performed as speci-
mitted. The welding procedure qualification impact test
fied in (1) through (6).
specimens shall be prepared and tested in accordance
with the applicable requirements of NF-2330 and (1) Charpy Vnotch test specimens representing both
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-4334. Retests in accordance with the provisions of the heataffected zone and the unaffected base material
NF-2350 are permitted. shall be tested. The unaffected base material shall be
tested at a temperature equal to or below that specified
NF-4335.1 Impact Tests of Weld Metal. in NF-2311(c).
(a) Impact tests of the weld metal shall be required for (2) The Charpy Vnotch tests of the unaffected base
welding procedure qualification tests for production weld material shall meet the applicable requirements of Table
joints exceeding 5/8 in. (16 mm) in thickness when the NF2331 for the applicable Class and acceptance category.
weld is made on the surface or penetrates the base mate- If the requirements are not met at the test temperature,
rial that requires impact testing in accordance with additional testing shall be performed at higher tempera-
NF-2310. In addition, such testing of the weld metal is re- tures until the above requirements are met.
quired for the welding procedure qualification tests for (3) The heataffected zone specimens shall be tested
any weld repair to base material that requires impact test- at the test temperature determined in (2). If the average
ing in accordance with NF-2310, regardless of the depth of applicable toughness value of the heataffected zone speci-
the repair. Exemption from impact testing under mens equals or exceeds the average applicable toughness
NF-2311(b)(9) and NF-2311(b)(10) does not apply to value of the unaffected base material, the qualification test
weld metal of the welding procedure qualification test is acceptable for the essential and supplemental essential
for either production weld joints or base material repairs variables recorded on the Welding Procedure Qualifica-
unless the specific weld metal used is included in tion Record. If the heataffected zone average applicble
Table NF-2311(b)-1 (weld metal exemptions are being toughness value is less than the unaffected base material
developed). average applicable toughness value, the adjustment given
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
in (4) through (6) shall be determined and applied as pro- (e) A Welding Procedure Specification qualified to the
vided in (c). Alternatively, another test coupon may be impact testing requirements of Subsection NB, NC, or NE
welded and tested. may be accepted as an alternative to the Welding Proce-
(4) Additional Charpy Vnotch tests shall be per- dure Specification impact testing requirements of this
formed on either the heataffected zone or the unaffected Subsection.
base material, or both, at temperatures where the applic-
able toughness values of all three specimens tested are not
less than that specified in (2). The average applicable NF-4400 RULES GOVERNING MAKING AND
toughness value for each test meeting this requirement REPAIRING WELDS
shall be plotted on a propertytemperature graph. The dif- NF-4410 PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN BEFORE
ference in temperature T H A Z and T U B M where the WELDING
heataffected zone and the unaffected base material aver-
NF-4411 Identification, Storage, and Handling of
age applicable toughness values are the same and not less
Welding Materials
than that specified in (2) shall be used to determine the
adjustment temperature T A D J where Each Certificate Holder is responsible for control of the
welding electrodes and other materials which are used in
the fabrication and installation of supports (NF-4120).
Suitable identification, storage, and handling of electrodes,
If T A D J 0, then T A D J = 0.
flux, and other welding material shall be maintained. Pre-
(5) As an alternative to (4), if the applicable tough- cautions shall be taken to minimize absorption of moisture
ness values of the heataffected zone are no less than those by electrodes and flux.
specified in Table NF2331 for the applicable Class and ac-
ceptance category and the average applicable toughness NF-4412 Cleanliness and Protection of Weld
value of the heataffected zone specimens is not less than Surfaces
7 ft-lb (10 J) or 5 mils (0.13 mm) below the average applic-
able toughness value of the unaffected base material, T A D J The method used to prepare the base metal shall leave
may be taken as 15F (8C). the weld preparation with reasonably smooth surfaces.
The surfaces for welding shall be free of scale, rust, oil,
(6) As a second alternative to (4), if the applicable
grease, and other deleterious material. The work shall be
toughness values of the heataffected zone are no less than
protected from deleterious contamination and from rain,
those specified in Table NF2331 for the applicable Class
snow, and wind during welding. Welding shall not be per-
and acceptance category, the difference between the aver-
formed on wet surfaces.
age applicable toughness value of the heataffected zone
and the unaffected base material shall be calculated and NF-4420 RULES FOR MAKING WELDED JOINTS
used as described in (c)(3).
(c) At least one of the following methods shall be used
NF-4421 Backing Strips
to compensate for the heataffected zone toughness de- The materials for backing strips, when used, shall be
crease due to the welding procedure. compatible with the base metal.
(1) The lowest service temperature specified in the
Design Specification for all of the material to be welded NF-4422 Peening
in production Welding Procedure Specifications sup- The weld metal may be peened when it is deemed ne-
ported by this Welding Procedure Qualification Record cessary or helpful to control distortion.
shall be increased by the adjustment temperature T A D J .
(2) The specified testing temperature for the produc- NF-4423 Double Welded Joints
tion material may be reduced by T A D J . Before applying weld metal on the second side to be
(3) The materials to be welded may be welded using welded, the root of full penetration double welded joints
the Welding Procedure Specification, provided they exhi- shall be prepared by suitable methods, such as chipping,
bit toughness values that are no less than the minimum re- grinding, or thermal gouging, except for those processes
quired toughness values specified in NF-2300 plus the of welding by which proper fusion and penetration are
difference in the average applicable toughness values es- otherwise obtained and demonstrated to be satisfactory
tablished in (b)(6). by welding procedure qualification.
(d) The Charpy Vnotch testing results shall be recorded
on the Welding Procedure Qualification Record and any NF-4424 Surfaces of Welds
offsetting T A D J or increased toughness requirements shall (a) The surface condition of the finished weld shall be
be noted on the Welding Procedure Qualification Record sufficiently free from coarse ripples, grooves, overlaps,
and on the Welding Procedure Specification. More than abrupt ridges, and valleys for the proper interpretation
one compensation method may be documented on the of radiographic and other required nondestructive exam-
Welding Procedure Qualification Record. inations of the welds. In those cases where there is a
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
question regarding the surface condition on the interpre- (1) the temporary attachment shall be completely re-
tation of a radiographic film, the film shall be compared moved in accordance with the procedures of NF-4211
to the actual weld surface for interpretation and determi- (2) as an alternative to (a)(5), postweld heat treat-
nation of acceptability. ment may be deferred until after removal of the
(b) Concavity on the root side of a single welded circum- attachment
ferential butt weld is permitted when the resulting thick- (3) the surface of the support shall be visually exam-
ness of the weld meets the requirements of NF-3000. ined after removal of the temporary attachment
(c) Fusion shall exist between adjacent layers of weld
metal and between weld metal and base metal except as NF-4440 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
provided in NF-5360(c). WELDING
(d) For inertia and continuous drive friction welding, NF-4441 ThroughThickness Loading
the weld upset shall meet the specified amount within Welded joint configurations causing significant
10%. Flash shall be removed to sound metal. throughthickness tensile stress [as defined in
NF-1215(b)] during fabrication or service on rolled pro-
NF-4427 Shape and Size of Welds duct forms should be avoided. When this type of construc-
(a) Fillet welds may vary from convex to concave. The tion is used, weld volume and welding heat input on the
shape and size of the weld shall be in accordance with rolled surfaces should be limited to the extent practical.
the requirements of Figure NF-4427-1. Convexity of fillet When identified by the Design Output Documents
welds is not a criteria for acceptance and need not be [NF-3226.3, NF-3256.4, and NF-3324.5(f)(3)(-h)], weld
measured. joints in primary members 1 in. (25 mm) or greater in
(b) The faces of groove welds may be flat or convex. The thickness in component supports subjected to significant
thickness of groove welds shall be no less than 1/32 in. throughthickness tensile loads and any other weld joints
(0.8 mm) less than the thickness of the thinner of the identified in the Design Output Documents shall meet one
members joined. of the following requirements:
(c) On webtoflange welds on girders, no underrun is (a) After completion of welding, the base material di-
permitted at the ends for a length equal to twice the width rectly underneath the attachment shall be ultrasonically
of the flange. examined in accordance with the requirements of
NF-5214, NF-5224, or NF-5234, as appropriate to the com-
NF-4429 Plug Welds ponent support class.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure NF-4427-1
Fillet Weld Dimensions
Size of
weld
(a) Equal Leg Fillet Weld [Note (1)]
Theoretical throat
Theoretical throat
Surface of Surface of
intersecting intersecting
member member
Intersecting
member
Through member
Theoretical
throat
Theoretical
throat
NOTES:
(1) The size of an equal leg fillet weld is the leg length of the largest inscribed right isosceles triangle. Theoretical throat = 0.7 size of weld.
(2) The size of an unequal leg fillet weld is the shorter leg length of the largest right triangle, which can be inscribed within the fillet weld cross
section.
(3) When the intersecting member is less than 60 deg, the weld shall be considered a partial penetration groove weld [NF-3324.5(d)(4)].
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Table NF-4622.1-1 13
Mandatory Requirements for Postweld Heat Treatment (PWHT) of Welds
Holding Minimum Holding Time at Temperature for Weld Thickness (Nominal)
Temperature
1
PNumber (Sect. Range, F (C) /2 in. (13 mm) Over 1/2 in. (13 mm) to Over 2 in. (50 mm) to
IX, QW420) [Note (1)] or less 2 in. (50 mm) 5 in. (125 mm) Over 5 in. (125 mm)
1, 3 1,1001,250 30 min 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm) 2 hr plus 15 min each 2 hr plus 15 min each
(595675) additional inch (2 h additional inch (2 h plus
plus 0.5 min/mm) 0.5 min/mm) over 2 in.
over 2 in. (50 mm) (50 mm)
4 1,1001,250 30 min 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm) 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm) 5 hr plus 15 min each
(595675) additional inch (5 h plus
0.5 min/mm) over 5 in.
(125 mm)
5A, 5B, 5C, 6 except 1,2501,400 5 hr plus 15 min each
PNo. 6 Gr. 4 (675760) additional inch (5 h plus
30 min. 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm) 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm)
6 Gr. 4 1,0501,150 0.5 min/mm) over 5 in.
(565620) (125 mm)
7 1,3001,400 30 min 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm) 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm) 5 hr plus 15 min each
(705760) additional inch (5 h plus
0.5 min/mm) over 5 in.
(125 mm)
9A Gr.1 1,1001,250 5 hr plus 15 min each
(595675) additional inch (5 h plus
30 min 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm) 1 hr/in. (2 min/mm)
9B Gr. 1 1,1001,175 0.5 min/mm) over 5 in.
(595635) (125 mm)
GENERAL NOTE: Exemptions to the mandatory requirements of this Table are defined in NF-4622.7.
NOTE:
(1) All temperatures are metal temperatures.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
NF-4622.4 Holding Times at Temperature. (3) Base material certified in accordance with
(a) The holding time at temperature as specified in NF-2210 may be postweld heat treated at these lower
Table NF-4622.1-1 shall be based on the nominal thick- minimum temperatures and increased minimum holding
ness of the weld. The holding time need not be continuous. times without recertification. Postweld heat treatment at
It may be an accumulation of the times of multiple post- these lower minimum temperatures and increased mini-
weld heat treatment cycles. mum holding times may also be the tempering operation,
(b) Holding time at temperature in excess of the mini- provided a higher tempering temperature is not required
mum requirements of Table NF-4622.1-1 may be used, by the material specification.
provided that specimens so heat treated are tested in ac- NF-4622.5 PWHT Requirements When Different
cordance with NF-2200, NF-2400, and NF-4300. PNumber Materials Are Joined. When materials of two
(c) Alternatively, when it is impractical to postweld heat different PNumber groups are joined by welding, the ap-
treat at the temperature range specified in plicable postweld heat treatment shall be that specified in
Table NF-4622.1-1, it is permissible to perform the post- Table NF-4622.1-1 for the material requiring the higher
weld heat treatment of certain materials at lower tem- PWHT temperature range.
peratures for longer periods of time in accordance with
Table NF-4622.4(c)-1 and (1) through (3). NF-4622.6 PWHT Requirements for
(1) Except for PNo. 1 materials, when welds in the NonpressureRetaining Parts. When
materials listed in Table NF-4622.4(c)-1 are to be post- nonpressureretaining material is welded to pressure re-
weld heat treated at these lower minimum temperatures, taining material, the postweld heat treatment temperature
the impact test specimens for the welding procedure qua- range of the pressure retaining material shall control.
lification required by NF-4300 shall be made using the NF-4622.7 Exemptions to Mandatory Requirements.
same minimum temperatures and increased minimum Postweld heat treatment in accordance with this Subarti-
holding time. Welding procedures, qualified at the tem- cle is not required for
perature range and minimum holding time specified in (a) nonferrous materials
Table NF-4622.1-1 and at the lower minimum tempera- (b) welds exempted in Table NF-4622.7(b)-1
ture and increased minimum holding time permitted by (c) welds subjected to temperatures above the PWHT
Table NF-4622.4(c)-1, are also qualified for any tempera- temperature range specified in Table NF-4622.1-1, pro-
ture in between. When such an inbetween temperature is vided the Welding Procedure Specification is qualified in
used, the minimum holding time shall be interpolated accordance with Section IX and the base material and
from Table NF-4622.1-1 and the alternative requirements the deposited weld material has been heat treated at the
of Table NF-4622.4(c)-1. higher temperature
(2) Except for PNo. 1 materials, when welds in the (d) postweld heat treatment is not required for sup-
materials listed in Table NF-4622.4(c)-1 are to be post- ports constructed of Type 405 material or of Type 410 ma-
weld heat treated at these lower minimum temperatures, terial with carbon content not to exceed 0.08%, welded
the welding material certification required by NF-2400 with electrodes that produce an austenitic chromium
shall be made using the same minimum temperatures nickel weld deposit or a nonairhardening nickel
and increased minimum holding time. Welding material chromiumiron weld deposit, provided the plate nominal
certified at the temperature range and minimum holding thickness at the welded joint does not exceed 3/8 in.
time specified in Table NF-4622.1-1, and at the lower (10 mm), and for thicknesses over 3/8 in. to 1 1/2 in.
minimum temperatures and increased minimum holding (10 mm to 38 mm), provided a preheat of 450F
time permitted by Table NF-4622.4(c)-1 is also certified (230C) is maintained during welding and the joints are
for any temperature in between. completely radiographed
Table NF-4622.7(b)-1
Exemptions to Mandatory PWHT
PNumber Max. Reported
(Sect. IX, Nominal Thickness Carbon, % Min. Preheat
QW420) Type of Weld [Note (1)] (NF-4622.3) [Note (2)] Reqd, F (C)
1 All welds where the materials 11/4 in. (32 mm) and less 0.30 or less
being joined are 11/2 in. Over 11/4 in. (32 mm) to 11/2 in. 0.30 or less 200 (95)
(38 mm) and less (38 mm)
3
/4 in. (19 mm) or less Over 0.30
Over 3/4 in. (19 mm) to 11/2 in. Over 0.30 200 (95)
(38 mm)
Fillet, partial penetration, and 3
/4 in. (19 mm) or less 200 (95)
repair welds in material over
11/2 in. (38 mm)
1
3 except Gr. 3 All welds /2 in. (13 mm) or less 0.25 or less 200 (95)
1
4 All welds in pipes NPS 4 (DN 100) /2 in. (13 mm) or less 0.15 or less 250 (120)
or less or tubes with nominal
O.D. 4.5 in. (114 mm) or less
and attachment welds
1
5A, 5B, 5C All welds in pipes or tubes with /2 in. (13 mm) or less 0.15 or less 300 (150)
maximum specified chromium
3.00% or less, NPS 4 (DN 100)
or less pipe, and nominal O.D.
4.5 in. (114 mm) or less tubes
6 (for Type Type 405 and 410S welded with 3
/8 in. (10 mm) or less 0.08 or less
410S) or 7 Gr. ANo. 8, ANo. 9, or FNo. 43
1 (for Type filler metal
405)
9A Gr. 1 All welds, provided the procedure 5/8 in. (16 mm) or less 200 (95)
qualification is made using
equal or greater thickness base
material than the production
weld [Note (3)]
Attachment welds joining 1
/2 in. (13 mm) or less 200 (95)
nonpressureretaining material
to pressureretaining material
over 5/8 in. (16 mm)
All welds in pipes NPS 4 (DN 100) 1/2 in. (13 mm) or less 0.15 or less 250 (120)
or less or tubes with nominal
O.D. 4.5 in. (114 mm) and less
9B Gr. 1 All welds, provided the procedure 5/8 in. (16 mm) or less 200 (95)
qualification is made using
equal or greater thickness base
material than the production
weld [Note (3)]
Attachment welds joining 1
/2 in. (13 mm) or less 200 (95)
nonpressureretaining material
to pressure retaining material
over 5/8 in. (16 mm)
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Table NF-4622.7(b)-1
Exemptions to Mandatory PWHT (Cont'd)
PNumber Max. Reported
(Sect. IX, Nominal Thickness Carbon, % Min. Preheat
QW420) Type of Weld [Note (1)] (NF-4622.3) [Note (2)] Reqd, F (C)
10A Gr. 1 All welds, provided the procedure 5/8 in. (16 mm) or less 200 (95)
qualification is made using
equal or greater thickness base
material than the production
weld
1
Attachment welds joining /2 in. (13 mm) or less 0.25 or less 200 (95)
nonpressureretaining material
to pressure retaining material
over 5/8 in. (16 mm)
1
All welds in pipes or tubes to /2 in. (13 mm) or less 0.25 or less 200 (95)
pressure retaining material
over 5/8 in. (16 mm)
10C Gr. 1 All welds in materials 11/2 in. 11/4 in. (32 mm) or less 0.30 or less
(38 mm) and less
Attachment welds joining Over 11/4 in. (32 mm) 200 (95)
nonpressureretaining material to 11/2 in. (38 mm)
to pressure retaining material 1/2 in. (13 mm) or less 200 (95)
over 11/4 in. (32 mm)
Groove or fillet welds attaching 1
/2 in. (13 mm) or less 200 (95)
nozzle connections not over
2 in. (50 mm) finished I.D. in
material over 11/4 in. (32 mm),
provided ligaments do not
require an increased shell or
head thickness
10I Gr. 1 All welds in material 1/2 in. 1
/2 in. (13 mm) or less
(13 mm) and less
11A Gr. 1 All welds in material 1/2 in. 1
/2 in. (13 mm) or less
(13 mm) and less
11A Gr. 4 All welds in material 1/2 in. 1
/2 in. (13 mm) or less 250 (120)
(13 mm) and less
11B Gr. 1 All welds in materials 1/2 in. 1
/2 in. (13 mm) or less
through Gr. 10 (13 mm) and less
GENERAL NOTE: The exemptions noted in this table do not apply to the following:
(1) electron beam welds in ferritic materials over 1/8 in. (3 mm) in thickness
(2) inertia and friction welds in material of any thickness of PNo. 3, PNo. 4, PNo. 5, PNo. 7 (except for Types 405
and 410S), PNo. 10, and PNo. 11 materials
NOTES:
(1) Where the thickness of material is identified in the Type of Weld column, it is the thickness of the base material at
the welded joint.
(2) Carbon level of the materials being joined.
(3) Weld Procedure Qualification coupon need not exceed 1.5 in. (38 mm) in thickness.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
(b) For PNo. 7 materials, the cooling rate at tempera- NF-4700 REQUIREMENTS FOR BOLTED
tures above 1,200F (650C) shall not exceed 100F/hr CONSTRUCTION
(56C/hr) after which the rate of cooling shall be suffi-
ciently rapid to prevent embrittlement. NF-4710 BOLTING AND THREADING
NF-4711 Thread Engagement
The threads of all bolts or studs shall be engaged for the
NF-4624 Methods of Postweld Heat Treatment full length of thread in the load carrying nut unless other-
The postweld heat treatment shall be performed in ac- wise specified in the Design Documents.
cordance with the requirements of one of the following
NF-4712 Thread Lubricants
subparagraphs.
Any lubricant or compound used in threaded joints shall
NF-4624.1 Furnace Heating One Heat. Heating be suitable for the service conditions and shall not react
the support or item in a closed furnace in one heat is the unfavorably with any support element material. Contact
preferred procedure and should be used whenever practi- surfaces within frictiontype joints shall be free of
cal. The furnace atmosphere shall be controlled so as to lubricants.
avoid excessive oxidation, and direct impingement of
flame on the support or item is prohibited. NF-4713 Removal of Thread Lubricants
All threading lubricants or compounds shall be removed
NF-4624.2 Furnace Heating More Than One Heat.
from surfaces which are to be welded.
The support or item may be heated in more than one heat
in a furnace, provided the furnace atmosphere control re- NF-4720 BOLTING
quirements of NF-4624.1 apply and overlap of the heated
sections of the support or item is at least 5 ft (1.5 m). NF-4721 Bolt Holes
When this procedure is used, the portion of the support For the purpose of this Article, high strength bolts shall
or item outside the furnace shall be shielded so that the be considered those with specified minimum yield
temperature gradient is not harmful. The cross section strength greater than 80 ksi (550 MPa). Bolt holes shall
where the support or item projects from the furnace shall meet the requirements of (a) through (e).
not intersect a structural discontinuity. (a) Holes for nonfitted bolts shall meet the require-
ments of Table NF-4721(a)-1. For anchor bolts set in con-
NF-4624.3 Local Heating. Welds may be locally post- crete or concrete expansion anchor, the hole sizes
weld heat treated when it is not practical to heat treat the indicated in this Subsection may be increased by 1/16 in.
entire support or item. Local postweld heat treatment (1.5 mm). When the bolt hole size is 1/8 in. (3 mm) larger
shall consist of heating a circumferential band around than the bolt, and the bolt is 1/2 in. (13 mm) or smaller,
the support or item at temperatures within the ranges standard washers shall be used.
specified in this Subarticle. The minimum width of the (b) Oversized or slotted bolt holes may be used with
controlled band at each side of the weld, on the face of high strength bolts 1/2 in. (13 mm) in diameter and larger,
the greatest weld width, shall be the thickness of the weld except as restricted in (1), (2), and (3).
or 2 in. (50 mm), whichever is less. The temperature of the (1) Oversized holes shall not exceed the requirements
support or item from the edge of the controlled band out- of Table NF-4721(b)-1. They may be used in any or all
ward shall be gradually diminished so as to avoid harmful plies of frictiontype connections. Hardened washers shall
thermal gradients. This procedure may also be used for be installed over exposed oversized holes.
postweld heat treatment after repairs. (2) Shortslotted holes shall not be wider than per-
mitted by (a) and shall not have a length exceeding the
NF-4624.4 Internal Heating. The support or item
oversize diameter allowed in (1) by more than 1/16 in.
may be heated internally by any appropriate means and
with adequate indicating and recording temperature de-
vices to aid in the control and maintenance of a uniform
distribution of temperature in the support or item. Pre- Table NF-4721(a)-1
vious to this operation, the support or item should be fully Bolt Hole Sizes
enclosed with insulating material. Bolt Size Hole Size
1 in. (25 mm) Bolt diameter plus 1/16 in.
(1.5 mm)
NF-4660 HEAT TREATMENT OF ELECTROSLAG 11/8 in. to 2 in. (28 mm to 50 mm) Bolt diameter plus 1/8 in.
WELDS (3 mm)
>2 in. (50 mm) Bolt diameter plus 3/16 in.
Electroslag welds in ferritic material over 1 1/2 in. (5 mm)
(38 mm) in nominal thickness at the joints shall be given
a grain refining heat treatment.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
loading conditions, but is limited to 70% of the specified calibrated wrenches, direct extension indicators, or the
minimum tensile strength of the fastener. The threaded as- turn of the nut method. The results of the test, required
sembly shall be tested for the dynamic loading conditions preload, and specified thread lubrication shall be provided
specified in the Design Specification, and the established in the Design Report.
preload shall be verified on the assembly by properly
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
ARTICLE NF-5000
EXAMINATION
tion to the satisfaction of a Level III Examiner. The proce- NPS 2 (DN 50) and less, may be examined by the rules
dures shall comply with the appropriate Article of Section of NF-5220.
V for the particular examination method. The digitization
of radiographic film and radioscopic images shall meet NF-5212 Primary Member Welded Joints
the requirements of Section V, Article 2, Mandatory Ap-
(a) All full penetration butt welded joints in primary
pendix III, Digital Image Acquisition, Display and Storage
members shall be examined by the radiographic method.
for Radiography and Radioscopy. Written procedures and
(b) All other welded joints in primary members shall be
records of demonstration of procedure capability and per-
examined by the liquid penetrant or magnetic particle
sonnel qualification shall be maintained on file as detailed
method, except that the exposed ends of welds need only
in the Certificate Holders Quality Program. At least one
be visually examined.
copy of the procedure shall be readily available to all ap-
plicable nondestructive examination personnel for refer- NF-5213 Secondary Member Welded Joints
ence and use.
All welded joints in secondary members shall be exam-
ined by the visual method.
NF-5113 PostExamination Cleaning
Following any nondestructive examination in which ex- NF-5214 Special Requirements
amination material is applied to the piece, the piece shall For weldments that impose loads in the through thick-
be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with applicable ma- ness direction of primary members 1 in. and greater in
terial or procedure specifications. thickness, the base material beneath the weld shall be
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
ultrasonically examined, when required by NF-4440, over NF-5232 Secondary Member Welded Joints
100% of the referenced area using the procedure of
All welded joints in secondary members shall be exam-
SA-577 or SA-578, as detailed in Section V to the accep-
ined by the visual method.
tance standards of NF-5332, except that a calibration
block representative of the primary member shall be used.
The block for straight beam examination shall have 1/4 in. NF-5234 Special Requirements
(6 mm) diameter flatbottomed holes at onefourth, one For weldments that impose loads in the through thick-
half, and threefourths of the thickness of the member ness direction of primary members 1 in. (25 mm) and
being welded, from which a distance amplitude curve shall greater in thickness, the base material beneath the weld
be established. shall be ultrasonically examined, when required by
NF-4440, over 100% of the referenced area using the pro-
NF-5220 EXAMINATION OF CLASS 2 AND MC cedure of SA-577 or SA-578, as detailed in Section V to the
SUPPORT WELDS acceptance standards of NF-5332, except that a calibration
NF-5221 Primary Member Welded Joints block representative of the primary member shall be used.
(a) All butt welded joints in primary members shall be The block for straight beam examination shall have 1/4 in.
examined by the liquid penetrant or magnetic particle (6 mm) diameter flatbottomed holes at onefourth, one
method. half, and threefourths of the thickness of the member
(b) All partial penetration or fillet welds in primary being welded, from which a distance amplitude curve shall
members that have a groove depth or throat dimensions be established.
greater than 1 in. (25 mm) and Twelded joints welded
with throat dimensions of 1/2 in. (13 mm) or greater shall NF-5240 INERTIA AND CONTINUOUS DRIVE
be examined by the liquid penetrant or magnetic particle FRICTION WELDS
method, except that the exposed ends of welds need only
(a) When radiographic examination is required by this
be visually examined.
Article, inertia and continuous drive friction welds shall
(c) All primary welds exclusive of those described in (a)
also be examined by the ultrasonic method to verify bond-
and (b) shall be examined by the visual method.
ing over the entire area.
NF-5222 Secondary Member Welded Joints (b) The materials used shall be those assigned a
PNumber by Section IX, but shall not include rimmed or
All welded joints in secondary members shall be exam-
semikilled steel.
ined by the visual method.
(c) One of the two parts to be joined must be held in a
NF-5224 Special Requirements fixed position and the other part rotated. The two faces
to be joined must be symmetrical with respect to the axis
For weldments that impose loads in the through thick- of rotation.
ness direction of primary members 1 in. (25 mm) and
(d) The weld between the two members shall be a full
greater in thickness, the base material beneath the weld
penetration weld.
shall be ultrasonically examined, when required by
NF-4440, over 100% of the referenced area using the pro-
cedure of SA-577 or SA-578, as detailed in Section V to the
acceptance standards of NF-5332, except that a calibration NF-5300 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS
block representative of the primary member shall be used. NF-5320 RADIOGRAPHIC ACCEPTANCE
The block for straight beam examination shall have 1/4 in. STANDARDS
(6 mm) diameter flatbottomed holes at onefourth, one
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-5321 Evaluation of Indications
half, and threefourths of the thickness of the member
being welded, from which a distance amplitude curve shall Indications shown on the radiographs of welds and
be established. characterized as imperfections are unacceptable under
the following conditions:
NF-5230 EXAMINATION OF CLASS 3 SUPPORT (a) any indication characterized as a crack or zone of in-
WELDS complete fusion or penetration
NF-5231 Primary Member Welded Joints (b) any other elongated indication which has a length
(a) Primary member welded joints that have a groove greater than
depth or throat dimension greater than 1 in. (25 mm) shall (1) 1/4 in. (6 mm) for t up to 3/4 in. (19 mm), inclusive
be examined by the liquid penetrant or magnetic particle (2) 1/3t for t from 3/4 in. (19 mm) to 21/4 in. (56 mm),
method, except that the exposed ends of welds need only inclusive
be visually examined. (3) 3/4 in. (19 mm) for t over 21/4 in. (56 mm)
(b) Primary welded joints exclusive of those described where t is the thickness of the thinner portion of the
in (a) shall be examined by the visual method. weld
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
(c) internal root weld conditions are acceptable when reexamination. After an indication has been verified to
the density change as indicated in the radiograph is not be nonrelevant, it is not necessary to reinvestigate repeti-
abrupt; elongated indications on the radiograph at either tive nonrelevant indications of the same type. Nonrelevant
edge of such conditions shall be unacceptable, as provided indications which would mask defects are unacceptable.
in (b) (c) Relevant indications are indications which result
(d) any group of aligned indications having an aggregate from imperfections. Linear indications are indications in
length greater than t in a length of 12t unless the mini- which the length is more than three times the width.
mum distance between successive indications exceeds Rounded indications are indications which are circular
6L , in which case the aggregate length is unlimited, L or elliptical with the length equal to or less than three
being the length of the largest indication times the width.
(e) rounded indications are not a factor in the accept-
ability of welds that are radiographed NF-5342 Acceptance Standards
NF-5330 ULTRASONIC ACCEPTANCE (a) Only imperfections producing indications with ma-
STANDARDS jor dimensions greater than 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) shall be con-
sidered relevant imperfections.
All imperfections which produce a response greater (b) Imperfections producing the following indications
than 20% of the reference level shall be investigated to are unacceptable:
the extent that the operator can determine the shape, (1) any cracks or linear indications
identity, and location of all such imperfections and evalu- (2) rounded indications with dimensions greater than
ate them in terms of the acceptance standards as given in 3
/16 in. (5 mm)
(a) and (b).
(3) four or more rounded indications in a line sepa-
(a) Imperfections are unacceptable if the indications ex- rated by 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) or less edge to edge
ceed the reference level amplitude and have lengths
(4) ten or more rounded indications in any 6 in. 2
exceeding
(4 000 mm2) of surface with the major dimension of this
(1) 1/4 in. (6 mm) for t up to 3/4 in. (19 mm), inclusive
area not to exceed 6 in. (150 mm), with the area taken
(2) 1/3t for t from 3/4 in. (19 mm) to 21/4 in. (56 mm),
in the most unfavorable location relative to the indications
inclusive
being evaluated
(3) 3/4 in. (19 mm) for t over 21/4 in. (56 mm) where t
is the thickness of the weld being examined; if a weld joins
NF-5350 LIQUID PENETRANT ACCEPTANCE
two members having different thicknesses at the weld, t is
STANDARDS
the thinner of these two thicknesses.
(b) Indications characterized as cracks, lack of fusion, or NF-5351 Evaluation of Indications
incomplete penetration are unacceptable regardless of (a) Mechanical discontinuities at the surface are re-
length. vealed by bleeding out of the penetrant; however, loca-
lized surface discontinuities such as may occur from
NF-5332 Acceptance Standards for Laminar machining marks or surface conditions may produce simi-
Indications lar indications which are not relevant.
Any indication detected in the base material beneath the (b) Any indication which is believed to be nonrelevant
weld which is of a laminar type is unacceptable if the indi- shall be reexamined to verify whether or not actual defects
cation cannot be contained within a circle having a dia- are present. Surface conditioning may precede the reexa-
meter equal to onehalf of the thickness of the thinner of mination. Nonrelevant indications and broad areas of pig-
the members joined. mentation which would mask defects are unacceptable.
(c) Relevant indications are indications which result
NF-5340 MAGNETIC PARTICLE ACCEPTANCE from imperfections. Linear indications are indications in
STANDARDS which the length is more than three times the width.
NF-5341 Evaluation of Indications Rounded indications are indications which are circular
or elliptical with the length equal to or less than three
(a) Mechanical discontinuities at the surface are re-
times the width.
vealed by the retention of the examination medium. All in-
dications are not necessarily defects, however, since
NF-5352 Acceptance Standards
certain metallurgical discontinuities and magnetic perme-
ability variations may produce similar indications which (a) Only imperfections producing indications with ma-
are not relevant. jor dimensions greater than 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) shall be con-
(b) Any indication which is believed to be nonrelevant sidered relevant imperfections.
shall be reexamined by the same or other nondestructive (b) Imperfections producing the following indications
examination methods to verify whether or not actual de- are unacceptable:
fects are present. Surface conditioning may precede the (1) any cracks or linear indications
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
(2) rounded indications with dimensions greater than (g) Only surface porosity whose major surface dimen-
3
/16 in. (5 mm) sion exceeds 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) shall be considered relevant.
(3) four or more rounded indications in a line sepa- Fillet and groove welds that contain surface porosity are
rated by 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) or less edge to edge unacceptable if
(4) ten or more rounded indications in any 6 in. 2 (1) the sum of diameters of random porosity exceeds
3
(4 000 mm2) of surface with the major dimensions of this /8 in. (10 mm) in any linear inch of weld or 3/4 in. (19 mm)
area not to exceed 6 in. (150 mm), with the area taken in in any 12 in. (300 mm) of weld or
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
the most unfavorable location relative to the indications (2) four or more pores are aligned and the pores are
being evaluated separated by 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) or less, edge to edge
(h) The length and location of welds shall be as specified
NF-5360 VISUAL ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS on the detail drawing, except that weld lengths may be
longer than specified. For weld lengths less than 3 in.
When visual examination is performed in accordance
(75 mm), the permissible underlength is 1/8 in. (3 mm),
with NF-5200, the acceptance standards shall be in accor-
and for welds 3 in. (75 mm) and longer, the permissible
dance with the following:
underlength is 1/4 in. (6 mm). Intermittent welds shall be
(a) Cracks are unacceptable.
spaced within 1 in. (25 mm) of the specified location.
(b) A fillet weld is permitted to be less than the size spe-
(i) Arc strikes and associated blemishes on the weld or
cified by 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) for onefourth the length of the
in the base material are acceptable provided no cracking is
weld. Oversized fillet welds are acceptable if the oversized
visually detected.
weld does not interfere with mating parts.
(j) Slag whose major surface dimension is 1/8 in. (3 mm)
(c) In fillet welds, incomplete fusion of 3/8 in. (10 mm) in
or less is irrelevant. Isolated surface slag that remains
any 4 in. (100 mm) segment, and 1/4 in. (6 mm) in welds
after weld cleaning and does not exceed 1/4 in. (6 mm) in
less than 4 in. (100 mm) long, is acceptable. For groove
its major surface dimension is acceptable. [Slag is consid-
welds, incomplete fusion is not acceptable. For fillet and
ered to be isolated when it does not occur more frequently
groove welds, rounded end conditions that occur in weld-
than once per weld or more than once in a 3 in. (75 mm)
ing (starts and stops) shall not be considered indications
weld segment.] Spatter remaining after the cleaning op-
of incomplete fusion and are irrelevant.
eration is acceptable.
(d) Overlap is acceptable provided the criteria for weld
size and fusion can be satisfied. When fusion in the overlap
length cannot be verified, an overlap length of 3/8 in.
(10 mm) in any 4 in. (100 mm) segment, and 1/4 in. NF-5500 QUALIFICATIONS AND
(6 mm) in welds less than 4 in. (100 mm) long, is CERTIFICATION OF
acceptable. NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION
(e) Craters are acceptable when the criteria for weld PERSONNEL
size are met. Craters that occur outside the specified weld
NF-5510 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
length are irrelevant provided there are no cracks.
(f) Requirements for acceptability of undercuts are as Organizations performing Code required nondestruc-
follows: tive examinations shall use personnel competent and
(1) For material 3/8 in. (10 mm) and less nominal knowledgeable to the degree specified by NF-5520. When
thickness, undercut depth of 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) on one side these services are subcontracted by the Certificate Holder
of the member for the full length of the weld, or 1/32 in. or Quality System Certificate Holder, he shall verify the
(0.8 mm) on one side for onehalf the length of the weld, qualification of personnel to the requirements of
and 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) for onefourth the length of the weld NF-5520. All nondestructive examinations required by
on the same side of the member is acceptable. For mem- this Subsection shall be performed by and the results eval-
bers welded on both sides where undercut exists in the uated by qualified nondestructive examination personnel.
same plane of a member, the cumulative lengths of under-
cut are limited to the lengths of undercut allowed on one NF-5520 PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION,
side. Meltthrough that results in a hole in the base metal CERTIFICATION, AND VERIFICATION
is unacceptable.
(2) For material greater than 3/8 in. (10 mm) nominal
NF-5521 Qualification Procedure
thickness, undercut depth of 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) for the full (a) Personnel performing nondestructive examinations
length of the weld and 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) for onefourth shall be qualified in accordance with the recommended
the length of the weld on both sides of the member is ac- guidelines of SNTTC1A.23,24 The ACCP qualified and cer-
ceptable. When either welds or undercut exist only on one tified NDE Personnel option shall not be used for Section
side of the member or are not in the same plane, the allow- III. The Employers25 written practice required by para-
able undercut depth of 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) may be increased graph 5 of SNTTC1A shall identify Employer require-
to 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) for the full length of the weld. ments relative to the recommended guidelines. The
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
recommended guidelines of SNTTC1A shall be consid- individual may independently accept the results of non-
ered minimum requirements except as modified in (1) destructive examinations when the specific acceptance
through (5). criteria are defined in the written instructions.
(1) Qualification of level III nondestructive examina- (b) For nondestructive examination methods not cov-
tion personnel shall be by examination. ered by SNTTC1A documents, personnel shall be quali-
(-a) The basic and method examinations, paras. fied to comparable levels of competency by subjection to
8.8.1 and 8.8.2 of SNTTC1A, may be prepared and admi- comparable examinations on the particular method
nistered by the Employer, ASNT, or an outside agency. involved.
(-b) The specific examinations, para. 8.8.3 of SNT (c) The emphasis shall be on the individuals ability to
TC1A, shall be prepared and administered by the Employ- perform the nondestructive examination in accordance
er or an outside Agency. The employer or outside agency wi th the ap plicable procedure for the intended
administering the specific examination shall identify the application.
minimum grade requirement in a written program when (d) For nondestructive examination methods that con-
the basic and method examinations have been adminis- sist of more than one operation or type, it is permissible
tered by ASNT which issues grades on a pass/fail basis. to use personnel qualified to perform one or more opera-
In this case, the minimum grade for the specific examina- tions. As an example, one person may be used who is qua-
tion may not be less than 80%. lified to conduct radiographic examination and another
(2) The written practice identified in paragraph 5 of may be used who is qualified to interpret and evaluate
SNTTC1A and the procedures used for examination of the radiographic film.
personnel shall be referenced in the Employers Quality
Program. NF-5522 Certification of Personnel
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(3) The number of hours of training and experience (a) The Employer retains responsibility for the ade-
for nondestructive examination personnel who perform quacy of the program and is responsible for certification
only one operation of a nondestructive examination meth- of Level I, II, and III nondestructive examination
od that consists of more than one operation, or perform a personnel.
nondestructive examination of limited scope, may be less (b) When ASNT is the outside agency administering the
than that recommended in Table 6.3.1 A and Table 6.3.1 B Level III basic and method examinations
of SNTTC1A. The training and experience times shall be [NF-5521(a)(1)(-a)], the Employer may use a letter from
described in the written practice and any limitations or re- ASNT as evidence on which to base the certification.
strictions placed on the certification shall be described in
(c) When an outside agency is the examining agent for
the written practice and on the certificate.
Level III qualification of the Employers personnel, the ex-
(-a) The minimum classroom training time identi-
amination results shall be included with the Employers
fied in Table 6.3.1 A and Table 6.3.1 B of SNTTC1A for Le-
record.
vel II certification may be reduced from 8 hr and 16 hr to
4 hr and 8 hr, respectively, for visual examination NF-5523 Verification of Nondestructive
personnel. Examination Personnel Certification
(4) For visual examination, the Jaeger Number 1 let-
ters shall be used in lieu of the Jaeger Number 2 letters The Certificate Holder has the responsibility to verify
specified in paragraph 8.2.1 of SNTTC1A. The use of the qualification and certification of nondestructive exam-
equivalent type and size letters is permitted. ination personnel employed by Material Organizations
(5) An NDE Level I individual shall be qualified to qualified by them in accordance with NCA3820, and sub-
properly perform specific setups, specific calibrations, contractors who provide nondestructive examination ser-
specific NDE, and specific evaluations for acceptance or re- vices to them.
jection determinations according to written instructions
and to record results. The NDE Level I individual shall re- NF-5530 RECORDS
ceive the necessary instruction and supervision from a Personnel qualification records identified in para. 9.4 of
certified NDE Level II or Level III individual. A Level I SNTTC1A shall be retained by the Employer.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
ARTICLE NF-8000
CERTIFICATES OF AUTHORIZATION AND CERTIFICATION
DOCUMENTS
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-8100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS NCA8000 and shall apply only to those items fabricated
under an NCA4000 Quality Assurance Program. Inspec-
The requirements for Certificates of Authorization and tion by an ANI and Certification Mark are not required
certification documents (Certificate of Compliance and for supports.
NS1 Certificate of Conformance) shall be as specified in
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
(In preparation)
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
ARTICLE NF-II-1000
INTRODUCTION
ARTICLE NF-II-2000
NOMENCLATURE
ARTICLE NF-II-3000
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
where
NF-II-3100 GENERAL
Kl/r = largest effective slenderness ratio of any unbraced
Single angle members are designed in accordance with length as defined in NF-3322.2
NF-II-3200 to NF-II-3600.
Cc =
1
when
(c) When the load is transmitted by transverse weld
through just one leg of the angle, A e is the area of the con- 7
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
nected leg.
(SI Units)
when
NF-II-3300 SHEAR
5
The allowable shear stress due to flexure and torsion
shall be when
2 6
when
NF-II-3400 COMPRESSION
7
The allowable compressive stress on the gross area of
axially compressed members shall be
where
when Kl/r < C c
b = full width of the longest angle leg
S y = specified minimum yield strength, ksi (MPa)
t = thickness of angle
3
For short, thin, or unequal leg angles, flexuraltorsional
buckling may produce a significant reduction in strength.
In such cases, the allowable stress shall be determined
when Kl/R > Cc by the previous equations substituting an equivalent slen-
derness ratio (Kl/r )equiv for Kl /r
4
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
where F e is the elastic buckling strength for the flexural determine the limiting combination of l /b and b /t for
torsional mode. which F b is equal to 0.66S y . For equal leg angles not meet-
(a) For equal leg angles with w as the axis of symmetry ing the limits of Figure NF-II-3510 and for unequal leg an-
gles, the bending stress is limited to the minimum
allowable value F b determined from NF-II-3511,
NF-II-3512, and NF-II-3513 as applicable.
NF-II-3511
(b) For unequal leg angles, F e is the lowest root of the
cubic equation To prevent local buckling when the tip of an angle leg is
in compression.
when
when
where
E = modulus of elasticity, ksi (MPa)
G = shear modulus, ksi (MPa) 9
Iz , Iw = moment of inertia about principal axes, in. 4
(mm4) when
J = torsional constant = 2b t 3/3 = t 2A /3, in.4 (mm4)
zo , wo = coordinates of the shear center with respect to
the centroid, in. (mm) 10
= z o 2 + w o 2 + (I z + I w )/A , i n .2 (m m 2);
Iz + Iw = Ix + Iy where
H = b = full width of angle leg in compression, in. (mm)
Q = stress reduction factor per eqs. NF-II-3400(5)
Fez = through NF-II-3400(7) with b as defined above
An angle leg shall be considered to be in compression if
the tip of the angle leg is in compression, in which case the
Few =
calculated stress f b at the tip of this leg is used.
Fej = NF-II-3512
A = cross-sectional area For the tip of an angle leg in tension
Kz ,Kw = effective length factors 11
l = unbraced length
rz , rw = radii of gyration about principal axes
For members whose design is based on compressive NF-II-3513
force, the largest effective slenderness ratio preferably To prevent lateraltorsional buckling, the maximum
should not exceed 200. compression stress shall not exceed
when F o b S y --`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-II-3500 FLEXURE 12
The allowable bending stress limits of NF-II-3510 shall
when F o b > S y
be used as indicated in NF-II-3520 and NF-II-3530.
13
NF-II-3510 ALLOWABLE BENDING STRESS
The allowable bending stress, F b , is a function of the un-
where
braced length to width ratio (l /b ) and the width to thick-
ness ration (b /t) of the single angle member. F b = allowable bending stress at leg tip, ksi (MPa)
For equal leg angles fabricated from materials with a F o b = elastic lateraltorsional buckling stress, from
minimum specified yield strength of 36 ksi (250 MPa) NF-II-3520 or NF-II-3530 as applicable, ksi (MPa)
and 50 ksi (345 MPa), Figure NF-II-3510 may be used to S y = yield stress, ksi (MPa)
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Figure NF-II-3510
Equal Leg Single Angle Limits for F b = 0.66S y
(Reprinted with Permission of AISC)
Equal leg angle members without lateraltorsional re- be taken as unity when the bending moment at any
straint subjected to flexure applied about one of the geo- point within an unbraced length is larger than at
metric axes may be designed considering only geometric both ends of its length.
axis bending provided l = unbraced length, in. (mm)
(a) The calculated compressive stress f b , using the geo-
metric axis section modulus, is increased by 25%.
(b) For the angle leg tips in compression, the allowable NF-II-3523
bending stress F b is determined according to NF-II-3513 Unequal leg angle members without lateraltorsional re-
where straint subjected to bending about one of the geometric
axes shall be designed using NF-II-3530.
(U.S. Customary Units)
14
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
NF-II-3530 BENDING ABOUT PRINCIPAL AXES angles. If the long leg is in compression anywhere
along the unbraced length of the member, use the
Angles without lateraltorsional restraint shall be de-
negative value of B w .
signed considering principal axis bending except for cases
Iw = major principal axis moment of inertia, in.4 (mm4)
covered by NF-II-3522. Bending about both of the princi-
Iz = minor principal axis moment of inertia, in.4 (mm4)
pal axes shall be evaluated using the interaction equations
rz = radius of gyration for minor principal axis, in. (mm)
in NF-3322.1(e)(1).
Sw = section modulus to tip of leg in compression, in.3
(mm3)
NF-II-3531 Equal Leg Angles zo = coordinate along z axis of the shear center with re-
spect to centroid, in. (mm)
(a) Major Axis Bending. The principal bending compres-
sion stress f b w shall be limited by F b in NF-II-3513 (b) Minor Axis Bending. The principal bending stress f b z
where shall be limited by F b in NF-II-3511 when leg tips are in
compression and by NF-II-3512 when the leg tips are in
(U.S. Customary Units) tension.
NF-II-3611
and by b /t provisions in NF-II-3511.
(b) Minor Axis Bending. The principal bending stress f b z In evaluating eq. NF-3322.1(e)(1)(20) or
shall be limited by F b in NF-II-3511 when the leg tips are NF-3322.1(e)(1)(22) the maximum compression bending
in compression, and by NF-II-3512 when the leg tips are in stresses due to each moment acting alone must be used
tension. even though they may occur at different cross sections
of the member.
16 Table NF-II-3532-1
B w Values for Angles
Angle Size, in. (mm) B w , in. [(103) m]
(SI Units) 9 4 (225 100) 6.54 (166)
8 6 (200 150) 3.31 (84)
8 4 (200 100) 5.48 (139)
16 7 4 (175 100) 4.37 (111)
6 4 (150 100) 3.14 (80)
6 3.5 (150 89) 3.69 (94)
and by b /t provisions in NF-II-3511 for the compression
5 3.5 (125 89) 2.40 (61)
leg. 5 3 (125 75) 2.99 (76)
4 3.5 (100 89) 0.87 (22)
4 3 (100 75) 1.65 (42)
Bw = 3.5 3 (89 75) 0.87 (22)
3.5 2.5 (89 63) 1.62 (41)
3 2.5 (75 63) 0.86 (22)
3 2 (75 50) 1.56 (40)
= special section property for unequal leg angles, po-
2.5 2 (64 50) 0.85 (22)
sitive for short leg in compression and negative for Equal legs 0.00 (0.00)
long leg in compression, in. (mm)
Table NF-II-3532-1 lists some values for standard
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
NF-II-3613 NF-II-3615
For members constrained to bend about a geometric For members that do not meet the conditions of
axis with compressive stress and allowable stress deter- NF-II-3613 or NF-II-3614, the evaluation shall be based
mined per NF-II-3521(a), the radius of gyration r b for on principal axis bending according to NF-II-3530, and
F e shall be taken as the geometric axis value. the subscripts x and y in NF-3322.1(e)(1) shall be inter-
preted as the principal axes, w and z , in this Appendix
NF-II-3614 when evaluating the length without lateraltorsional
For equal leg angles without lateraltorsional restraint restraint.
along the length and with bending applied about one of
the geometric axes, the provisions of NF-II-3522 shall ap- NF-II-3620 AXIAL TENSION AND BENDING
ply for the calculated and allowable bending stresses. If Members subjected to both axial tension and bending
NF-II-3521(b) or NF-II-3522 is used for F b , the radius of stresses due to transverse loading shall satisfy the re-
gyration about the axis of bending r b for F e shall be taken quirements of eq. NF-3322.1(e)(1)(22). Bending stress
as the geometric axis value of r divided by 1.35 in the ab- evaluation shall be as directed by NF-II-3613,
sence of a more detailed analysis. NF-II-3614, and NF-II-3615 for compressive stresses.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ARTICLE NF-III-1000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Energy absorbing material of lineartype pipe supports yielding, shall be constructed for services in accordance
designed to Subsection NF which is designed to dissipate with Section III, Division 1, Subsection NF, as modified
energy associated with dynamic piping movements by by this Appendix.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
ARTICLE NF-III-2000
MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
ARTICLE NF-III-3000
DESIGN
For the design of energy absorbing support material (b) Design Fatigue Curves. Design fatigue curves based
that perform by sustaining strains beyond elastic limits, on testing of prototypical samples of energy absorbers
the following rules shall apply in lieu of those in shall be developed and used in the fatigue design. Samples
NF-3140 and NF-3300. tested shall represent the material used for construction,
(a) Fatigue Design shapes used, and methods of fabrication. The fatigue de-
sign curves shall show a relationship between the ampli-
(1) Energy absorbing support material may be de- tude of strain ( ) and the allowable number of cycles
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
signed by load rating. The load rating of these parts shall (N ). The ordinate shall show the value of strain, , and
provide for a relationship between imposed strains and the abscissa shall show the allowable number of cycles,
the allowable number of cycles. N, calculated as follows:
(2) Cumulative fatigue effects associated with all
strain cyles expected for the life of the energy absorbing
support parts resulting from all service loadings shall be
whichever is smaller, where
evaluated as follows:
N m e a n = mean number of cycles to failure of specimen
tested at strain value,
= maximum deviation
(c) Dead Weight Consideration. Loads induced by the
dead weight effect of a supported piping system should
where not exceed onefifth of the elastic yield load capacity of
N d j = allowable number of cycles read from the design the energy absorbing supports. The elastic yield load shall
fatigue curve, as defined below, corresponding to be based on the yield strength given in Appendix I (Section
the amplitude of the strain induced by the dynamic III Appendices) for the material of the energy absorbing
load, j parts.
N t i = allowable number of cycles read from the design (d) Steady State Vibration Consideration. Operational
fatigue curve, as defined below, corresponding to steady state vibration effects on the energy absorbing sup-
the amplitude of the strain induced by the dynamic port parts, if present, shall be maintained within the en-
load, i durance limit from the applicable fatigue design curves of
n d j = expected number of cycles associated with dy- Appendix I (Section III Appendices).
namic load, j (e) Piping Design Consideration. The inelastic character-
n t i = expected number of cycles associated with the sup- istics of energy absorbing support parts shall be consid-
ported piping system in going from one service ered in satisfying all design and service loadings for
temperature to another, i which the supported piping is evaluated.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
ARTICLE NF-III-4000
FABRICATION
ARTICLE NF-A-1000
INTRODUCTION
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
duce deviation to 15%.
In all cases, hardened washers should be used beneath
the bolt head or nut (whichever is rotated during tighten- 3
ing) when tightening by torque wrench method.
where
So, it is observed that K 1 , K 2 , and K 3 contribute roughly
D = nominal bolt size, in. (mm) 50%, 40%, and 10%, respectively, to the torque coefficient
K = torque coefficient (not to be confused with coeffi- K.
cient of friction) Coefficient K 1 represents the torque resulting from fric-
T = torque, lbin. (Nmm) tion on the bearing face of the nut or bolt. This is about
W = bolt tension, lb (N) 50% of the total torque. K 1 varies with the coefficient of
The torque coefficient K is the critical parameter in the bearing face friction (0.120.20) and also with the effec-
above equation and can be calculated by various methods, tive radius of the bearing face, R B . The radius R B is
all of which represent approximations at best. It is primar-
ily influenced by the frictional conditions along the thread
flank and at the bearing surfaces. Relative resiliency of the Figure NF-A-1311
fastener and joint material also provide influence. For
these reasons, it is best to experimentally determine K
for critical applications using actual joint material and as-
sembly tools. Arbitrary values for K are often assigned in
noncritical applications as follows:
K = 0.20 for nonplated steel fasteners26
= 0.15 for plated fasteners26
Generally, the above K values are conservative, and the
actual preload induced by a given torque is slightly less
than calculated.
A more exact value of K is expressed by the following
equation, provided there is no thread interference such
as by a locknut or wrenchtight thread fit:
2
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
approximately the average radius of the bearing face if the K should be determined experimentally for the particular
contact pressure is uniform (NOTE: The exact theoretical application. Even so, K will vary considerably because of
values of R B for uniform contact pressure is variations in field conditions.
(d) There is little difference in K between coarse and
fine threads the value for coarse threads being only
about 21/2% higher than that for fine threads, which is neg-
ligible. This may be surprising to some people who may
where R o and R i are the outer and inner bearing radii, think that the small helix angle of fine threads should pro-
respectively.). duce tension with considerably less torque. Such is not the
If the bearing face is not true and flat and the pressure case, however, because 90% of the torque effort is con-
uniform, R B may vary from the inner radius of the bearing sumed by friction regardless of the thread pitch. This high
face to the outer radius. frictional effect also helps prevent loosening of the
Coefficient K 2 represents the torque resulting from fric- fastener.
tion on the contact flanks of the threads. This represents (e) The value of K as estimated does not apply at or near
about 40% of the total torque. K 2 varies with the coeffi- the failure point of the boltnut combination, particularly if
cient of thread friction (0.120.20) and also with the ra- the imminent failure is by stripping of threads. In this si-
dius of action of friction on thread faces, R T . The radius tuation, there may be galling of contact surfaces with
R T is approximately the pitch radius of the screw thread greatly increased K . Also, the thread angle, , becomes
if thread contact pressure is uniform. If contact pressure greatly distorted, further increasing K . These influences,
is not uniform, R T may vary from the inner to the outer ra- added to the normal variations of K , result in an indeter-
dius of contact of threads. The radius R T also will differ minate value of K . From this, it is evident that the torque
between coarse and fine threads, being larger for fine at failure cannot be taken as any reliable measure of the
threads, resulting in higher torque. K 2 is also slightly vari- strength of the fastener.
able with bolt tension because of increase in angle due to
NF-A-1320 TURNOFTHENUT
thread bending under load. The increase in angle may be
considerable at loads near thread failure by stripping. Turnofthenut tightening process encompasses a low
Coefficient K 3 represents the useful torque producing initial threshold torque to achieve snug tight condition
bolt tension. This is about 10% of the total applied torque. (achieved by a few impacts of an impact wrench or the
K 3 varies with R T (see K 2 above) and with the helix angle force of a person using a spud wrench) followed by a pre-
of the thread. The helix angle, C , varies with the bolt size, scribed amount of nut turning to develop the required
being somewhat larger for smaller bolt sizes. It also varies preload. This technique has gained acceptance for installa-
between coarse and fine threads, being slightly larger for tion of high strength structural bolts, and can be reliably
coarse threads. extrapolated to smaller fasteners as long as assumptions
upon which the technique is based are considered. For ex-
ample, the ideal snugtight condition will vary with each
NF-A-1312 Summary of Tensioning by Torque application.
Nut rotation through a prescribed amount eliminates
From the preceding discussion, the following summary the influence of all friction variables relative to final ac-
can be made: curacies. Also, a onehalf turn from snugtight of a coarse
(a) Equation NF-A-1311(1), using K = 0.2, gives a rea- thread nut on a bolt having a grip length (the clamping dis-
sonable estimate of torque required to produce a given tance between the bolt head and nut) less than 8 in. will
tension regardless of bolt size or thread pitch. This applies induce preload equal to or slightly over the bolts rated
only to washer faced or double chamfered hex nuts (or proof load. For grip lengths greater than 8 in., two thirds
bolts if bolt is torqued) having a width across flats of about of a turn beyond snugtight is recommended.
1.5 times the nominal diameter; to threads free of interfer-
ence such as provided by a locknut or wrenchtight thread NF-A-1330 LOADINDICATING WASHERS
fit; to steel bolts and nuts as normally produced and with- Loadindicating washers provide high reliability for in-
out added plating or lubrication; and to applications itial indication of fastener tension. The loadindicating
where the torqued bearing face of the fastener is in contact washer employs small raised areas on a ductile washer
with relatively smooth, unplatted, nonlubricated steel face that will deform under compression at the time of
surfaces. tightening. A feeler gage is employed to measure the
(b) A more exact theoretical expression of K can be ob- amount of deformation to supply the correct fastener ten-
tained from eq. NF-A-1311(3). sion. Although these devices are accurate within 10% of
(c) There is considerable variation in the value of K expected tension, they cannot be reused if the bolted joint
from bolt to bolt even when conditions are well controlled is disassembled for any reason. In addition, if the preload
because of variation in coefficient of friction. Therefore, relaxes over time, there is no way to check the bolt tension
where closer control of tension is required, the value of short of installing new loadindicating washers.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Presence or lack of lubrication during installation does or surfaces exists, bolt bending will occur, and this will
not have an adverse effect on the ability of the give an incorrect indication of actual bolt tension. Strain
loadindicating washer to measure the correct tension in gages installed 180 deg to each other on the bolt shank
the assembly. In general this simple method of measuring can be wired to effectively cancel out the effects of fasten-
tension can be considered a reliable, fairly economical way er bending.
to correctly tension bolted assemblies.
ARTICLE NF-B-1000
INTRODUCTION
NF-B-1100 OBJECTIVE linear type supports. Most of the information herein per-
tains to linear supports while information on allowable
The objective of this Appendix is to provide background stresses and design stress intensities for plate and shell
on the allowable stresses and design stress intensities supports is referenced in Appendix III, Article III2000
used for the design of supports given in NF-3000. (Section III Appendices) for Class 1 of this Section. Gui-
dance is also given for special situations which arise in
NF-B-1200 SCOPE support design.
ARTICLE NF-B-2000
LINEAR SUPPORTS METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING ALLOWABLE
STRESSES
Allowable stresses are based on mechanical properties NF-B-2300 BEAM BENDING ALLOWABLE
of material, including yield and ultimate strength values, STRESS
as well as the particular loads applied to the linear mem-
ber, i.e., tension, bending, compression, shear, or combina- Classical beam flexure theory is used to establish bend-
tions of these loads. The pertinent mechanical properties ing stresses in linear support members. Allowable bending
of materials, the material yield and ultimate strength, al- stresses are established on the basis of this classical theo-
lowed for linear supports have been established and these ry, utilizing the following assumptions:
are presented in Section II, Part D of this division. The var- (a) Stresses are elastic.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ious stress factors given in NF-3300 for linear elastic ana- (b) Deflections are small.
lysis are applied in most cases to the yield or ultimate (c) Plane sections, normal to the member axis, remain
strength values at temperature. Stress multipliers referred plane after loading.
to as stress limit factors applicable to the various Service For a straight member in flexure, the bending stress is
Limits are given in Table NF-3312.1(b)-1 for linear sup- tensile on one side of the neutral axis and compressive
ports. In general, these factors maintain elastic response on the other side. The allowable values given in
for lower limits, A and B, and they allow higher stress NF-3322.1(d) consider whether the stress is tensile or
and some possible permanent deformation for higher lim- compressive, since a compressive stress (limited to
its, C and D. twothirds of the critical buckling value) subjects a beam
element to possible buckling. Hence, the equations for al-
lowable stresses consider lateraltorsional buckling, by ac-
counting for the unsupported length of the compression
NF-B-2100 RESPONSIBILITY FOR flange, and they also consider local buckling, by providing
ASSIGNING YIELD AND maximum values of widththickness ratios of unstiffened
ULTIMATE STRENGTH VALUES elements of compression flanges.
Figure NF-B-2400-2 gives effective length factors for semi these combined stresses and the resulting amplification
rigid end conditions in which beams or girders which of the bending stress induced by the applied axial load.
frame into the ends of columns provide partial moment re- The primary or secondary bending moment is one of the
straint. The nominal safety factors for Design and Service important parameters which is used in the interaction
Level A limits range from 1.67 for short columns, which equations. When the moment results in secondary stress,
exhibit postbuckling strength, to 1.92 for long columns, the limit of the plastic hinge criterion is increased by 50%.
which buckle elastically and often without warning. A However, to ensure conservatism, the stability limits are
further limitation on compression member stress is given not increased when the moment is shown to result in sec-
by the requirement that these stresses be limited to ondary stress. Limit analysis design methods in NF-3340
twothirds of the member capacity regardless of the ser- provide similar requirements for linear members loaded
vice limit. in combined axial compression and bending.
Flexural support members also developed compressive
stresses in flanges. The two failure modes associated with
these stresses are: local buckling; and lateral torsional
buckling. Local buckling is prevented by limiting the flange NF-B-2600 BOLTING ALLOWABLE STRESS
width/thickness ratios [ NF-3322.2(d)] and lateral
torsional buckling is prevented by the allowable bending Bolted connections are subjected to tensile and shear
stresses [NF-3322.1(d)]. loads. Shear connections are designed to be one of the
two types
(a) bearing connections
NF-B-2500 BEAMCOLUMN ALLOWABLE
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(b) friction connections
STRESS
Since bearing connections can be subjected to simulta-
Beamcolumns are those linear support members which neous shear and tension, an interaction equation is given
are subjected to combined flexure and axial compression. in NF-3324.6 to account for the combined stresses in the
The interaction equations of NF-3322.1(e)(1) account for bolts. Friction connections can also be subjected to
Figure NF-B-2400-1
Effective Length Factor for Various End Conditions
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
ARTICLE NF-B-3000
PLATE AND SHELL SUPPORTS ALLOWABLE STRESSES
Allowable stresses for plate and shell type supports are stress intensities (S m ) are given in Appendices 1 and 2
established in accordance with NF-3220 (Class 1), of Section II, Part D. Stress multipliers, i.e., stress limit fac-
NF-3250 (Class 2 and MC), and NF-3260 (Class 3), respec- tors which are applicable to various levels of service limits
tively. For Class 1 construction allowable stresses are a are given in Tables NF-3221.2-1 and NF-3251.2-1. In gen-
function of the material design stress intensity (S m ) and eral, these factors maintain elastic response for lower lim-
for Class 2, 3, and MC construction the allowable stresses its, A and B, and they allow higher stresses and some
are a function of the material allowable (S ). The proce- possible permanent deformation for higher limits, C and D.
dures for establishing allowable stresses (S ) and design
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
ARTICLE NF-B-4000
MATERIALS WITH LOW RATIOS OF TENSILE TO YIELD STRENGTH
Allowable stresses for linear support members were low strain hardening by imposing a nominal factor of
originally developed for materials which exhibit a consid- safety of 2 on tensile strength on effective net area.
erable amount of strain hardening. The ratio of tensile to Table NF-B-4000 shows that minimum factor of safety is
yield strength for these materials (S u /S y ) is as high as 1.34 for a material with the lower bound S u /S y ratio of
1.61 for SA-36. However, materials with much lower va- 1.07. The minimum factor of safety for a high strain hard-
lues of S u /S y ratio are now included in the Code, and these ening material is about 1.43.
are covered by the NF design rules and allowable stresses Designers should use caution when materials with low
in NF-3000. The lower bound of S u /S y is 1.07. For certain S u /S y ratios are utilized in support design. The material
allowable stresses the factor of safety against failure is ductility and other material qualities, including S u /S y ra-
lower for materials with low S u /S y ratios than it is for tios, should be considered so that the minimum factors
high strain hardening materials. The allowable tensile of safety will not be less than those shown in
stress (see NF-B-2200) takes into account materials with Table NF-B-4000.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Table NF-B-4000
Factors of Safety for a Material With a Low
Value of S u /S y Ratio
Service Level Tension Bending Compression
A 2.00 1.78 1.67
B 1.50 1.34 1.50
C 1.43 1.43 1.50
D 1.43 1.43 1.50
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) The ratio of tensile to yield strength (S u /S y ) is
1.07 for the factors of safety shown. This is a
lower bound for linear support materials al-
lowed by the Code.
(b) Materials with higher S u /S y ratios will have
higher factors of safety.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
ARTICLE NF-B-5000
SPECIAL CONSIDERATION
NF-B-5100 COPPERBASED ALLOYS steel columns. These alternate rules provide a minimum
factorofsafety of 2.15 for Design and Level A Service Lim-
Copperbased alloys are not intended for use as main its. The allowable compressive stress is a bilinear function
structural members. However, the Code does provide for of slenderness ratio, K l/r , rather than a parabolic function
their use in the load path of a support. Use of copperbased which is used for other materials.
alloys is restricted by NF-2122(b) to bearingtype applica-
tions. This restriction was incorporated because experi-
ence with these materials as main members in supports NF-B-5300 NONDUCTILE BEHAVIOR AND
is lacking and behavior of elements fabricated of these ma- STRESS CORROSION CRACKING
terials has not been confirmed with test data.
High strength materials are susceptible to brittleness
and stress corrosion cracking. Conditions which exacer-
NF-B-5200 STAINLESS STEEL bate these problems include
Allowable stresses for stainless steel are based on the (a) installation in a corrosive environment such as
same consideration given to other Code materials. These damp air
are discussed in NF-B-1000 and NF-B-2000. However, (b) longterm high stress including bolt preload and
stainless steel in compression requires special considera- dead loads
tion because the compression stressstrain curve is non- (c) residual stress caused by fabrication
linear rather than bilinear as it is for carbon steels. For (d) certain material manufacturing processes which en-
linear support members this difference in stressstrain re- hance hardness
lationships results in overestimating the column capacity The design specification can reduce the susceptibility of
of members fabricated from austenitic stainless steel. the support material to brittle fracture by requiring im-
To account for the different characteristics with austeni- pact testing per NF-2300. Also, designers should exercise
tic stainless steel exhibits when it is subjected to compres- caution when using high strength materials when sup-
sive stress, NF-3322.1 provides special rules for stainless ports are subjected to impact loads.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
ARTICLE NF-C-1000
INTRODUCTION
ARTICLE NF-C-2000
MATERIAL AVAILABILITY AND REQUIREMENTS DIFFERENCES
The grades of structural steel contemplated for use ex- application. In these cases, users are advised to make use
tend to a yield strength of 100,000 psi. It is not possible to of literature on the specific properties of concern and to
incorporate all factors that might merit consideration in exercise good engineering judgement.
the selection and specification of materials for a particular
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
ARTICLE NF-C-3000
AISC PARAGRAPH SELECTIONS
The Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erec- slenderness ratios, widththickness, plate girders and
tion of Structural Steel for Buildings of the American Insti- rolled beams, simple and continuous spans, gross and
tute of Steel Construction was used as a source of design net areas, connections, bolts, welds, builtup members, ex-
practice. The paragraphs selected for inclusion cover al- pansion, column bases, anchor bolts, and slender com-
lowable stress, combined stresses, stability and pression elements.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
ARTICLE NF-C-4000
CROSSREFERENCE TO AISC
The paragraph number of the crossreference is given to contained in the Ninth Edition of the Manual of American
correlate the 1998 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Institute of Steel Construction (ASD) June 1, 1989 (see
Subsection NF to the Specification for the Design, Fabrica- Table NF-C-4000).
tion and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Table NF-C-4000
Design Basis for LinearType Supports
NF Paragraph AISC Paragraph NF Paragraph AISC Paragraph NF Paragraph AISC Paragraph
3321.1(a) A5.1 3322.2(d)(2)(-c) B5.1, Appendix B5 3322.6(e)(4)(-a) G4
3321.2 K4 3322.2(e) Appendix B5 3322.6(e)(4)(-b) G4
3322.1(a)(1) D1 3322.2(e)(1) Appendix B5 3322.6(e)(4)(-c) G4
3322.1(a)(2) D3.1 3322.2(e)(2) Appendix B5 3322.6(e)(4)(-d) G4
3322.1(b)(1) F4 3322.2(e)(2)(-a) Appendix B5 3322.6(e)(4)(-e) G4
3322.1(b)(2) J4 3322.2(e)(2)(-b) Appendix B5 3322.6(e)(4)(-f) G4
3322.1(c)(1)(-a) E2 3322.2(e)(2)(-c) Appendix B5 3322.6(f) J7
3322.1(c)(1)(-b) E2 3322.2(e)(2)(-d) Appendix B5 3322.6(g) B6
3322.1(d)(1)(-a) F1.1 3322.2(e)(3) Appendix B5 3322.7(a)(1) B8
3322.1(d)(1)(-a)(1) B5.1 3322.2(e)(3)(-a) Appendix B5 3322.7(a)(2) B8
3322.1(d)(1)(-a)(2) B5.1 3322.2(e)(3)(-a)(1) Appendix B5 3322.7(a)(3) L2
3322.1(d)(1)(-a)(3) B5.1 3322.2(e)(3)(-a)(2) Appendix B5 3322.8(a) B1, B2
3322.1(d)(1)(-a)(4) B5.1 3322.2(e)(3)(-b) Appendix B5 3322.8(c) B2
3322.1(d)(1)(-a)(5) F1.1 3322.2(e)(3)(-c) Appendix B5 3322.8(c)(1) B2
3322.1(d)(1)(-a)(6) F3.1 3322.2(e)(4) Appendix B5 3322.8(c)(1)(-a) B2
3322.1(d)(1)(-a)(7) B5.1 3322.2(e)(4)(-a) Appendix B5 3322.8(c)(1)(-b) B2
3322.1(d)(1)(-b) F1.1 3322.2(e)(4)(-b) Appendix B5 3322.8(c)(1)(-c) B2
3322.1(d)(2) B5.1, F1.2 3322.2(e)(5) Appendix B5 3322.8(c)(1)(-d) B3
3322.1(d)(3) F2, F3.1 3322.2(e)(5)(-a) Appendix B5 3322.8(c)(1)(-d)(1) B3
3322.1(d)(4) F3.2 3322.2(e)(5)(-b) Appendix B5 3322.8(c)(1)(-d)(2) B3
3322.1(d)(5)(-a) F1.3 3322.2(e)(5)(-c) Appendix B5 3322.8(c)(1)(-d)(3) B3
3322.1(d)(5)(-b) F1.3 3322.2(e)(6) Appendix B5 3322.8(c)(1)(-e) B3
3322.1(d)(5)(-c) F1.3 3322.3(a) B10 3322.8(c)(2) B2
3322.1(d)(6) F2.2 3322.3(b) B10 3322.8(c)(3) B1
3322.1(e)(1) H1 3322.3(c) F6 3322.8(c)(4)(-a) D3.3
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Table NF-C-4000
Design Basis for LinearType Supports (Cont'd)
NF Paragraph AISC Paragraph NF Paragraph AISC Paragraph NF Paragraph AISC Paragraph
3324.5(d)(2)(-a) J2.2.b 3324.6(a) J3.4 3341.1(a) N1
3324.5(d)(2)(-b) J2.2.b 3324.6(a)(1) J3.4 3341.1(b) N1
3324.5(d)(3)(-a) J2.2.a 3324.6(a)(2)(-a)(1) J3.4 3341.1(c) N1
3324.5(d)(3)(-b) J2.2.b 3324.6(a)(2)(-a)(2) J3.4 3342.1(a) N5
3324.5(d)(3)(-c) J2.2.b 3324.6(a)(3)(-a) J3.5 3342.1(b) N4
3324.5(d)(4) J2.2.a 3324.6(a)(3)(-b) J3.6 3342.1(c) N7
3324.5(d)(5) J2.2.a 3324.6(a)(4) J3.6 3342.1(d) N6
3324.5(d)(6) J2.2.a 3324.6(a)(5) J3.7 3342.1(e)(1) N7
3324.5(d)(7) J2.2.b 3324.6(b)(1) J3.9 3342.1(e)(2) N7
3324.5(d)(8) J2.2.b 3324.6(b)(1)(-a) J3.9, J3.7 3342.2(b)(1) N4
3324.5(d)(9) J2.2.b 3324.6(b)(1)(-b) J3.9
3342.2(b)(2) N4
3324.5(e)(1) J2.3.b 3324.6(c) J3.10
3342.2(b)(3) N4
3324.5(e)(2) J2.3.b 3324.6(d) J3.8
3342.2(b)(4) N4
3324.5(e)(3) J2.3.b 3324.6(e) J3.3
3342.2(b)(5) N4
3324.5(e)(4) J2.3.b 3324.6(f) J3.11
3342.2(c) N3
3324.5(e)(5) J2.3.b 3324.6(g) J10
3342.2(c)(1) N3
3324.5(e)(6) J2.3.b 3324.7 J9
3324.5(e)(7) J2.3.a 3331.1 K4, Appendix K 3342.2(c)(2) N3
3324.5(f) J2.1.a 3331.2 Appendix K4 3342.2(d)(1) N9
3324.5(f)(1) J2.1.a 3332.1 K4.1 3342.2(d)(2) N9
3324.5(f)(2) J2.1.a 3332.2 K4.1 3342.2(d)(3) N9
3324.5(f)(3)(-a) J2.1.a 3332.3 K4.1 3342.2(e)(1) N8
3324.5(f)(3)(-b) J2.1.a 3332.4 K4.2 3342.2(e)(2) N8
3324.5(f)(3)(-c) J2.1.a 3332.5 K4.3 3342.2(e)(3) N8
3324.5(f)(3)(-f) J2.1.a 3332.5(a) K4.3 3342.2(e)(4) N8
3324.5(f)(3)(-g) J2.1.a 3332.5(b) K4.3 3342.2(e)(5) N8
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
ARTICLE NF-D-1000
INTRODUCTION
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
signer consider the degree of deviation from nominal
sembly makeup dimensions 1/8 in. (3 mm). Squareness of
design which can be tolerated when supports are manu-
cut 1 deg, not to exceed 1/8 in. (3 mm) offset.
factured as well as when they are installed. It is the intent
(3) Plates and bars for critical dimensions (as defined
of this Appendix to provide guidance to the designer as to
by the designer) 1/8 (3 mm). Squareness of cut 1 deg, not
the need for establishing such tolerances and dimensional
to exceed 1/8 in. (3 mm) offset.
inspection requirements.
(4) Tolerances for noncritical dimensions shall be to
the individual manufacturers standard.
NF-D-1200 SCOPE (d) Clamps for pipe and tubing, formed and fabricated,
are shown in Table NF-D-1320-1.
Tolerances referred to in this Appendix apply only to (e) Angularity all forming operations 4 deg.
such values that may affect Code compliance of a support (f) Punched holes
and are not already addressed in the body of the Code. Any (1) Location center to edge, or center to center
other dimensions and tolerances associated with a sup- 1/8 in. (3 mm).
port are not addressed. (2) Diameter plus 0.2 times metal thickness or
minus 1/32 in. (0.8 mm).
NF-D-1300 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (g) Drilled holes as specified on manufacturers
drawings.
NF-D-1310 MATERIAL (h) Machined parts as specified on manufacturers
Material supplied to an SA, SB, SFA Specification, or drawings.
Table NCA-7100-1, Dimensional Standards, need not have
material dimensional tolerances specified by the support NF-D-1330 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
designer. Material provided to those specifications and (a) Installation tolerances of supports need to be estab-
standards have their own tolerances and the use of nom- lished. There are two categories of installation tolerances
inal dimension design is adequate. However, tolerance(s) associated with a support. The first is a local installation
on any manufacturing operation(s) affecting the support tolerance affecting only the load capacity of the support it-
load capacity needs to be considered. self. The second is a global installation tolerance which
may affect the conclusions of the component or piping
NF-D-1320 FABRICATION TOLERANCES qualification.
The recommended fabrication tolerances are listed in (b) Table NF-D-1330-1 provides acceptable local instal-
(a) through (h). lation tolerances for supports. When support installation
(a) Tolerances for raw material such as strip, sheet, bar, meets these tolerances, any change in the established sup-
plate, pipe, tubing, structural and bar size shapes, bolting, port load capacity is considered minor to the point that ex-
hot wound springs, and cold wound springs shall be in ac- isting load capacity calculations are adequate. Global
cordance with recognized standards or specifications for installation tolerances should be addressed in the piping
this raw material. or component Design Specification or Design Report.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Table NF-D-1320-1
Clamp Tolerances
Pipe Centerline to
Clamp, I.D. Diameter Load Bolt Hole
Up to 2 in. (50 mm) 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) 1/8 in. (3 mm)
Over 2 in. to 4 in. (50 to 100 mm) 1/8 in. (3 mm) 1/8 in. (3 mm)
Over 4 in. to 8 in. (100 to 200 mm) 3/16 in. (5 mm) 1/4 in. (6 mm)
Over 8 in. to 18 in. (200 to 450 mm) 1/4 in. (6 mm) 3/8 in. (10 mm)
Over 18 in. to 30 in. (450 to 760 mm) 3/8 in. (10 mm) 1/2 in. (13 mm)
Over 30 in. (760 mm) 1/2 in. (13 mm) 1/2 in. (13 mm)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Clamp I.D. equals pipe or tubing O.D. plus suitable clearance as established by the clamp manufacturer.
(b) Clamp I.D. measured at one half of the clamp width.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Table NF-D-1330-1
Local Installation Tolerances for Supports
Item Total Tolerance Configuration
I. Tolerances for General Measurement/Installation
A) Deviations in the location of the centerline of any attachment to the 1/4 in. (6 mm) C
flange centerline of building steel member(s) or support steel 1/ in.
member(s); if the support drawing specifies an offset, the attachment 4
(6 mm)
may be relocated to any distance towards the centerline of the member to
facilitate installation.
B) Deviation of backtoback distance for channels with rod type support. 1/4 in. (6 mm)
1/ in.
4
( 6 mm)
D) Deviation in the centerline location of attachments between flanges of 1/4 in. (6 mm)
building steel members.
1/ in. 1/ in.
4 4
(6 mm) (6 mm)
Between Between
C
6 in.
(150 mm)
6 in.
(150 mm)
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Table NF-D-1330-1
Local Installation Tolerances for Supports (Cont'd)
Item Total Tolerance Configuration
II. Tolerances for Attachment Installation (Cont'd)
B) Deviations in the centerline location of attachments along building steel 6 in. (150 mm)
member length.
6 in. 6 in.
(150 mm) (150 mm)
Along Along
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
6 in.
(150 mm) 3 in.
(75 mm)
B) Deviation of attachment centerline for a single steel cantilever member +3 in. (75 mm)
attached to the building structure. [Note (1)]
No limit
(75 mm)
3 in.
C
Attachment
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Table NF-D-1330-1
Local Installation Tolerances for Supports (Cont'd)
Item Total Tolerance Configuration
III. Tolerances for Support Steel Member Installation (Cont'd)
C) Deviation of connection centerline for double (or more) cantilevers. See +1/4 in. (6 mm)
C
figure. [Note (2)]
No limit
Attachment
(75 mm)
3 in.
1/ in. No limit
4
(6 mm)
( + 5 deg
- 3 deg )
E) Deviation in brace work point with respect to cantilever. 1 in. (25 mm)
Work
point
1 in. 1 in.
21/2 deg
B) Deviation of centerline of attachment with respect to specified 1/2 in. (13 mm) 1/ in.
attachment point. 2
C (13 mm)
C
C
1/ in.
2
(13 mm)
C) Deviation of CEA location with respect to design location.* 1/4 in. (6 mm)
* Minimum edge distance must be maintained.
1/ in.
4 S
(6 mm)
S
1/ in.
4
(6 mm)
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
Table NF-D-1330-1
Local Installation Tolerances for Supports (Cont'd)
Item Total Tolerance Configuration
V. Tolerances for Embedment Plate Attachment Installation
Deviation in attachment centerline with respect to embedment plate design location.
A) Individual embedment plate. 1/4 in. (6 mm) [Note
(3)]
6 in. 6 in.
(150 mm) (150 mm)
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
A) Deviation in variable spring load settings. 10% of specified
loads
B) Deviation in constant spring settings. 1
/4 in. (6 mm) of
specified position
C) Deviation in cold setting of snubber. 1
/4 in. (6 mm) of
specified setting
VII. Miscellaneous Tolerances
A) Deviation in gap between pipe and supporting steel member (in Gap (G) Size
nonsupport direction). 1/8 in. (3 mm) G < 1/8 in. (<3 mm)
+1/2 in. 1
/8 in. (3 mm)< G < 1/2 in. (13 mm)
(+13 mm), 0
+1/2 in. (13 mm), G > 1/2 in. (13 mm)
1/8 in. (3 mm)
B) Deviation in dimensions of piping support lugs applicable
measurement
tolerance.
C) Deviation in weld size. specified size
minimum, no
max.
D) Deviation in weld length.
For welds <3 in. (<75 mm) long 1/8 in. (3 mm), no
max.
For welds 3 in. (75 mm) long 1/4 in. (6 mm), no
max.
NOTES:
(1) A cantilever with a kneebrace connection has the same installation tolerances as a single cantilever. See items D) and E) for
knee-brace tolerances.
(2) Any cantilever member (single, both members of a double, etc.) can be shortened any distance required to complete installation.
(3) The designer shall determine the appropriate distances to be maintained between centerline or edge of attachments and edge of
embedment plates.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
ARTICLE NF-E-1000
NF-E-1100 SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS load on the piping system due to restraint of thermal
movement at low start-up temperatures of the damper
NF-E-1110 SCOPE fluid.
The scope of Nonmandatory Appendix NF-E is confined
to a discussion of the three major types of dynamic re-
straints, providing information for their design, function, NF-E-1230 APPLICATIONS
application, and modeling methods.
Dampers are utilized to provide vibration control, re-
straint to pressure pulses in piping systems, and response
NF-E-1120 DEFINITIONS to seismic motion and other dynamic events.
Refer to NCA-9200 for definitions of damper, energy ab-
sorber, and snubber.
NF-E-1240 MODELING
Dampers are dynamic restraint supports that are inac-
NF-E-1200 DAMPERS
tive during static loading. Devices of this type transmit
NF-E-1210 DESCRIPTION their velocity proportional loads directly into the piping
Dampers are dynamic restraint supports used to reduce system or component. Several computer programs allow
cyclic motions caused by earthquakes, shock, or opera- the introduction of single dampers into the piping system
tional excitations such as those from vibration-coupled or component model. Conventional analysis may be used
machinery or pressure pulses in the pipe system (see where
NF-3412.5). Locally installed dampers reduce rapid dis- (a) modal system analysis is performed with damping
placements of the system and increase overall system as stipulated in the Design Specification
damping. (b) increased piping system damping is as determined
by tests
NF-E-1220 FUNCTION (c) an equivalent stiffness parameter is derived for each
One particular type of damper is a viscous damper. damper type from tests
Dampers of this type usually consist of a piston sur- (d) stiffness is a function of damper fluid temperature
rounded by a highly viscous fluid in a damper housing. Alternatively, a time history analysis may be performed
They react to displacement immediately, and are therefore with programs that allow the use of single element
effective against operational vibration with a wide range damping.
of amplitude and frequency as well as cyclic displace-
ments caused by earthquakes and other dynamic events.
The amount of damping provided is proportional to the re-
lative velocity between the damper piston and the hous- NF-E-1300 ENERGY ABSORBERS
ing. When immersed in the viscous liquid, the piston can
NF-E-1310 DESCRIPTION
move in all directions, limited only by the dimensions of
the damper housing. Damping is therefore possible in all Energy absorbers are linear or nonlinear supports that
six degrees of freedom at the damper attachment point incorporate parts designed to dissipate energy associated
to the piping system. The amount of damping and stiffness with dynamic movements (see NF-1213). Undesirable
is dependent on the damper fluid temperature. Some stress peaks are avoided by conversion of kinetic energy
types of dampers may cause significant resistance and through deformation or yielding of parts.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ergy by the rubbing and sliding of cable strands when such There are two types of snubbers available: hydraulic
strands are subjected to dynamic displacements. The and mechanical.
energy-absorbing component of such devices is known (a) Hydraulic snubbers are velocity activated, and de-
as a wire-rope isolator. pend on fluid passing through an orifice from a high-
(b) Some types absorb energy by friction, which is gen- pressure portion of the fluid system to a lower pressure
erated in a reciprocating piston and cylinder arrangement. portion of the device. The controlled flow rate determines
(c) Some energy-absorbing restraints employ steel flex the linear displacement of the piston rod. When the snub-
plates that act as a spring, which allows for thermal expan- ber activates, it provides resistance to sudden movements
sion and also absorbs energy by plastic deformation of the that exceed a velocity threshold. Hydraulic snubbers
plates during dynamic movement. usually are designed to accommodate fluid volume
(d) Some devices absorb energy by forcing a wedge into changes caused by ambient temperature.
a tube at a predetermined load limit. Forces in excess of (b) Mechanical snubbers are either velocity or accelera-
the load limit are converted into deformation energy, tion activated. The snubber activates and resists sudden
rather than loading the attached components. movements that exceed a velocity or acceleration
threshold.
NF-E-1330 APPLICATIONS Although some versions of snubbers lock when acti-
Energy absorbers are suitable for use as dynamic re- vated, most allow limited movement after activation, gen-
straints or pipe whip restraints. erally referred to as release rate or bleed rate.
NF-E-1440 MODELING
Snubbers are modeled as inactive during analysis of all
nondynamic load cases, and as rigid supports for the dy-
namic load cases.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
ENDNOTES
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
vessel during the plant operation (for supports within containment), or alternatively, the calculated or measured
minimum metal temperature of the support expected during normal operation when the pressure within the compo-
nent exceeds 20% of the system hydrostatic test pressure.
6 The requirements for impact testing of the heataffected zone (NF-4335.2) may result in reduced test temperatures or
increased toughness requirements for the base material.
7 The methods given in the Appendix of SFA 5.9, Specification for CorrosionResisting Chromium and ChromiumNickel
Steel Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes, shall be used to establish a welding and sampling method for the pad,
groove, or other test weld to ensure that the weld deposit being sampled will be substantially free of base metal
dilution.
8 The word rod s as used in this Subarticle is intended to cover rods that are threaded. It also includes forged piston
rods if they are threaded for a portion of their length. It does not apply to unthreaded bar stock.
9 This definition of stress intensity is not related to the definition of stress intensity applied in the field of fracture
mechanics.
10 Stress means the maximum normal stress (principal stress).
11 For determination of effective net area, see NF-3322.8.
12 For this case, K is taken as unity.
13 Only eq. NF-3322.1(d)(5)(-b)(19) is applicable to channels.
14 See NF-3322.3 for further limitations in plate girder flange stress.
15 For the use of larger C b values, see: The Structural Stability Research Council, Guide to Stability Design Criteria for
Metal Structures, 3rd edition, p. 135.
16 When parts in contact have different yield stresses, S y shall be the smaller value.
17 Webs of flexural members are covered by the provisions of NF-3322.6(a) and NF-3322.6(e)(2) and are not subject to
the provisions of this paragraph.
18 Assumes net area of plate at widest hole as basis for computing compression stresses.
19 Equation NF-3322.6(e)(2)(45) recognizes the contribution of tension field action.
20 Members having a different thickness at the pinhole location are termed builtup.
21 As used here, interior support may be taken to include a rigid frame knee formed by the junction of a column and a
sloping or horizontal beam or girder.
2013 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 - NF
22 For qualification and inservice testing information pertaining to snubbers, refer to ASME QME1 subsection QDR and
ASME OM Code subsection ISTD.
23 SNTTC1A is a Recommended Practice for Nondestructive Testing Personnel Qualification and Certification pub-
lished by the American Society for Nondestructive Testing, 1711 Arlingate Lane, P.O. Box 28518, Columbus, Ohio
432280518.
24 Personnel qualified by examination and certified to previous editions of SNTTC1A are considered to be qualified to
the edition referenced in Table NCA-7100-2 when the recertification is based on continuing satisfactory performance.
All reexaminations and new examinations shall be in accordance with the edition referenced in Table NCA-7100-2.
25 Employer as used in this Article shall include: N type Certificate Holders; Material Organizations Certificate Holders;
Material Organizations who are qualified in accordance with NCA3842; and organizations who provide subcon-
tracted nondestructive examination services to organizations described above.
26 In applications where additional lubricants such as greases, oils, and waxes are applied to the fasteners, K may be
assumed to be as low as 0.12.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2013 ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code
AN INTERNATIONAL CODE
The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC) is An International Historic Mechanical
Engineering Landmark, widely recognized as a model for codes and standards worldwide.
Its development process remains open and transparent throughout, yielding living
documents that have improved public safety and facilitated trade across global markets
and jurisdictions for nearly a century.
ASME also provides BPVC users with integrated suites of related offerings:
referenced standards training and development courses
related standards and guidelines ASME Press books and journals
conformity assessment programs conferences and proceedings
You gain unrivaled insight direct from the BPVC source, along with the professional
quality and real-world solutions you have come to expect from ASME.
--`,``,``,,`,````,,,,,`````,`,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
60003F
5/15/13 5:22 PM